Home

TP-Link TL-WR710N User Guide

1. WAN Connection Type L2TP Russia L2TP v User Name username Password s nmnns Disconnect Disconnected Dynamic IP Static IP Server IP AddressName IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 DNS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Internet IP Address 0 0 0 0 Internet DNS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MTU Size in bytes 1460 The default is 1460 do not change unless necessary Max Idle Time 15 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Connection Mode Connect on Demand Connect Automatically Connect Manually Save Figure 4 14 WAN L2TP Russia L2TP gt User Name Password Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP These fields are case sensitive gt Dynamic IP Static IP Choose either as you are given by your ISP Click the Connect button to connect immediately Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately 2432 TL WR710N MUI LTS MI TINA A ETT TLL gt Connect on Demand You can configure the Router to disconnect from your Internet connection after a specified period of inactivity Max Idle Time If your Internet connection has been terminated due to inactivity Connect on Demand enables the Router to automatically re establish your connection as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again If you wish to activate Connect on Demand check the radio button If you want your Internet connection to remain active at al
2. Select Enabled in the Status pull down list k OQ Click the Save button 5 Click the Back button The filtering rules that configured should be similar to the following list Enter the MAC address 00 0A EB B0 00 0B 00 0A EB 00 07 5F in the MAC Address field Filtering Rules ID MAC Address Status Description 1 00 0A EB B0 00 0B Enabled wireless station A 2 00 0A EB 00 07 5F Enabled wireless station B Deny the stations specified by any enabled entries in the list to access Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access Modify Modify Delete Modify Delete Figure 8 20 Filtering Rules 8 6 4 Wireless Advanced Choose menu Wireless Wireless Advanced and then you can configure the advanced settings of your wireless network Transmit Power High v Beacon Interval loo 40 1000 RTS Threshold 2346 256 2346 Fragmentation Threshold 2346 256 2346 DTIM Interval ao 1 255 Enable WMM Enable Short GI C Enable AP Isolation Save Wireless Advanced Figure 8 21 Wireless Advanced Transmit Power Here you can specify the transmit power of Router You can select High Middle or Low which you would like High is the default setting and is recommended Beacon Interval Enter a value between 20 1000 milliseconds for Beacon Interval here The beacons are the packets sent by the Router to synchronize a wireless netwo
3. TL WR710N MUI tele T A N ETA TT 4 Enter the allowed domain name of the website either the full name or the keywords e g google in the Allowed Domain Name field Any domain name with keywords in it e g www google com will be allowed 5 Select from the Effective Time drop down list the schedule e g Schedule_1 you want the entry to take effect If there are not suitable schedules for you click the Schedule in red below to go to the Advance Schedule Settings page and create the schedule you need 6 Inthe Status field you can select Enabled or Disabled to enable or disable your entry 7 Click the Save button Click the Enable All button to enable all the rules in the list Click the Disable All button to disable all the rules in the list Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table Click the Next button to go to the next page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Add or Modify Parental Control Entry The Schedule is based on the time of the Router The time can be setin System Tools gt Time settings MAC Address of Children s PC All MAC Address In Current LAN Please Select hee Website Description Allowed Website Name Effective Time Anytime Y The time schedule can be setin Access Control gt Schedule Status Enabled x Figure 4 54 Add or Modify Parental Control Entry For examp
4. Pinging 202 108 22 5 with 64 bytes of data Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 1 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 2 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 3 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 4 Figure 8 86 Diagnostic Results amp Note Only one user can use this tool at one time Ping Count Ping Packet Size and Ping Timeout are Ping Parameters Traceroute Max TTL is Traceroute Parameter 258 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL 8 17 3 Firmware Upgrade The page allows you to upgrade the latest version firmware to keep your router up to date Firmware Upgrade File Browse Firmware Version 3 15 11 Build 131125 Rel 50653n Hardware Version WR710N v2 00000000 Figure 8 87 Firmware Upgrade New firmware is posted at www tp link com and can be downloaded for free If the router is not experiencing difficulties there is no need to upgrade firmware unless the new firmware supports a new feature you need c Note 1 3 When you upgrade the router s firmware you will lose current configuration settings so make sure you backup the router s settings before you upgrade its firmware Make sure that your computer is connected to the Internet through the cable when you upgrade the firmware To upgrade through wireless connection is not allowed Set your IP address as static IP before
5. gt Current PIN The current value of the device s PIN is displayed here The default PIN of the device can be found in the label or User Guide gt Restore PIN Restore the PIN of the device to its default gt Gen New PIN Click this button and then you can get a new random value for the device s PIN You can ensure the network security by generating a new PIN 107 TL WR710N MUI LTS NI TINA AN ETT TLL gt Disable PIN of this Device WPS external registrar of entering the device s PIN can be disabled or enabled manually If the device receives multiple failed attempts to authenticate an external Registrar this function will be disabled automatically gt Add Device You can add a new device to the existing network manually by clicking this button To add a new device If the wireless adapter supports Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS you can establish a wireless connection between wireless adapter and device using either Push Button Configuration PBC method or PIN method Note To build a successful connection by WPS you should also do the corresponding configuration of the new device for WPS function meanwhile For the configuration of the new device here takes the Wireless Adapter of our company for example ll By PBC If the wireless adapter supports Wi Fi Protected Setup and the Push Button Configuration PBC method you can add it to the network by PBC with the following two methods Method
6. gt IP Address Domain Name Type the destination IP address e g 202 108 22 5 or Domain name e g http www tp link com Pings Count The number of Ping packets for a Ping connection The default is 4 gt Ping Packet Size The size of Ping packet The default is 64 gt Ping Timeout Set the waiting time for the reply of each Ping packet If there is no reply in the specified time the connection is overtime The default is 800 gt Traceroute Max TTL The max number of hops for a Traceroute connection The default is 20 Click Start to check the connectivity of the Internet The Diagnostic Results page displays the result of diagnosis If the result is similar to the following screen the connectivity of the Internet is fine Diagnostic Results Pinging 202 108 22 5 with 64 bytes of data P 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seg 1 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 2 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 3 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 4 Figure 6 32 Diagnostic Results c Note Only one user can use this tool at one time Options Number of Pings Ping Size and Ping Timeout are used for Ping function Option Tracert Hops are used for Tracert function 161 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLEL 6 9 2 Firmware Upgrade Choose menu System Tools Firmware Upgrade and then you can update the latest version of
7. Quick Setup Finish Congratulations This device is now connecting you to the Internet For detail settings please click other menus if necessary Figure 3 16 Quick Setup Finish If there is something changed on the Wireless page you will see the Finish page as shown in Figure 3 17 Click the Reboot button to make your wireless configuration take effect and finish the Quick Setup 20 TL WR710N MUI tele T A MCL TT Quick Setup Finish Congratulations This device is now connecting you to the Internet For detail settings please click other menus if necessary The change of working mode config will not take effect until this device reboot Figure 3 17 Quick Setup Finish 3 2 3 Repeater Mode When you choose Repeater Mode on Working Mode page in Figure 3 5 take the following steps 1 Click Next and then Wireless Repeater page will appear as shown in Figure 3 18 Quick Setup Wireless Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish Repeater Mode Setting Wireless Name of Root AP also called SSID MAC Address of Root AP Region United Kingdom w WDS Mode Auto v Wireless Security Mode No Security Figure 3 18 Quick Setup Wireless gt Wireless Name of Root AP The SSID of AP that you want to access gt MAC Address of Root AP The MAC address of AP that you want to access gt Survey Click this button you
8. e Away from the potential sources of interference such as PCs microwaves and cordless phones e Away from large metal surfaces 2 Failure to follow these guidelines can result in significant performance degradation or inability to wirelessly connect to the Router 49 TL WR710N MUI tele T A MCL TITS 4 7 2 Wireless Security Choose menu Wireless Wireless Security and then you can configure the security settings of your wireless network There are three wireless security modes supported by the Router WPA WPA2 Personal WPA WPA2 Enterprise and WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy Wireless Security Disable Security WPA MWPA2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Recommended Encryption Automatic Recommended Wireless Password You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters between 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period 0 Seconds Keep it default if you are not sure minimum is 30 0 means no update WPA MWPA2 Enterprise Version Automatic y Encryption Automatic v Radius Server IP Radius Port 1812 1 65535 0 stands for default port 1812 Radius Password Group Key Update Period 0 in second minimum is 30 0 means no update O WEP Type Automatic v WEP Key Format Hexadecimal vj Key Selected WEP Key Key Type Key 1 Disabled Key 2 Disabled Key 3 Disabled Key 4 Disabled Save Figure 4 20 Wireless Security gt Disable S
9. 11n up to 150Mbps Automatic 11g 54 48 36 24 18 12 9 6M Automatic 11b 11 5 5 2 1M Automatic Frequency Expansion DSSS Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Modulation DBPSK DQPSK CCK 16 QAM 64 QAM BPSK QPSK Security 64 128 152 bit WEP WPA WPA2 WPA2 PSK WPA PSK 135M 70dBm 10 PER sensviy pen SM adame or PER 6M 92dBm 10 PER Mode Wireless Router Mode Access Point Mode Repeater Mode Client Mode WISP Client Router Mode Environmental and Physical Operating 0 40 32F 104F Temperature Storage 40 C 70 C 40 F 158 F Operating 10 90 RH Non condensing Humidity Storage 5 90 RH Non condensing 272 TL WR710N MUI LTS II TINA AN ETT TS Appendix D Glossary gt 802 11n 802 11n builds upon previous 802 11 standards by adding MIMO multiple input multiple output MIMO uses multiple transmitter and receiver antennas to allow for increased data throughput via spatial multiplexing and increased range by exploiting the spatial diversity perhaps through coding schemes like Alamouti coding The Enhanced Wireless Consortium EWC 3 was formed to help accelerate the IEEE 802 11n development process and promote a technology specification for interoperability of next generation wireless local area networking WLAN products gt 802 11b The 802 11b standard specifies a wireless networking at 11 Mbps using direct sequence spread spectrum DSSS
10. Access Control Rule in the left to return to the Access Restriction Rule Management page Select Enable Internet Access Restriction and choose Deny the packets not specified by any access Restriction policy to pass through the Router Click Add New button to add a new rule as follows 80 Then you will go back to the Access Restriction Rule Management page and see the following list TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL In Rule Name field create a name for the rule Note that this name should be unique for example Rule_1 In Host field select Host_1 In Target field select Target_1 In Schedule field select Schedule_1 In Action field select Allow In Status field select Enabled Click Save to complete the settings ID Rule Name Host Target Schedule Status Modify 1 Rule_1 Host 1 Target 1 Schedule 1 Edit Delete setup Wizard Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Figure 4 59 Rule Settings 4 13 2 Host Choose menu Access Control Host you can view and set a Host list in the screen as shown in Figure 4 60 The host list is necessary for the Access Restriction Rule gt Host Description Here displays the description of the host and this description is unique gt Host Settings 1D Host Description Information Modify Add New Delete A Previous Next Current No 4 v Page Figure 4 60 Host Settings Information Here displays the informa
11. Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table Click the Next button to go to the next page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Add or Modify Parental Control Entry The Schedule is based on the time of the Router The time can be setin System Tools gt Time settings MAC Address of Children s PC All MAC Address In Current LAN Please Select hee Website Description Allowed Website Name Effective Time Anytime Y The time schedule can be setin Access Control gt Schedule Status Enabled x Figure 8 50 Add or Modify Parental Control Entry For example If you desire that the child PC with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA can access www google com on Saturday only while the parent PC with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 BB is without any restriction you should follow the settings below 1 Click Parental Control menu on the left to enter the Parental Control Settings page Check Enable and enter the MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 BB in the MAC Address of Parental PC field 236 TL WR710N MUI TINA AN ETT LTL 2 Click Access Restriction Schedule on the left to enter the Schedule Settings page Click Add New button to create a new schedule with Schedule Description is Schedule_1 Day is Sat and Time is all day 24 hours 3 Click Parental Control menu on the left to go back to t
12. Name File System Folder Delete Figure 7 19 Media Server Setting gt Server Name The name of this Media Server gt Server Status Indicates the Media Server s current status started or stopped You can click the Start button to start the Media Server and click the Stop button to stop it gt Name The display name of this folder gt File System The file system type on the partition can be FAT32 or NTFS gt Folder The real full path of the specified folder gt Delete You can delete the share folder by click Delete To set up your media server please follow the instructions below 1 Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 7 20 Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 7 20 Media Server Setting 181 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL 2 Click the Start button to start the media server and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 7 21 Server Name Server Status O Auto scan every 2 hours gt Add share folder Name File System Media Server Setting TP LINK_010628 Started Scan All Folder Delete Figure 7 21 Media Server Setting 3 Click the Add share folder button to specify a folder as the search path of media server The sc
13. Only the PCs listed can browse the built in web pages to perform Administrator tasks and then enter each MAC Address in a separate field The format for the MAC Address is XX XX XX XX XX XX X is any hexadecimal digit Only the PCs with MAC address listed can 74 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT TLL use the password to browse the built in web pages to perform Administrator tasks while all the others will be blocked After click the Add button your PC s MAC Address will be placed in the list above Click the Save button to save your settings E Note If your PC is blocked but you want to access the Router again press and hold the WPS button for more than 5 seconds to reset the Router to factory defaults 4 11 4 Remote Management You can configure the Remote Management function on this page This feature allows you to manage your Router from a remote location via the Internet Remote Management Web Management Port 80 Remote Management IP Address 0 0 0 0 Enter 255 255 255 255 for all Figure 4 52 Remote Management gt Web Management Port Web browser access normally uses the standard HTTP service port 80 This router s default remote management Web port number is 80 For greater security you can change the remote management Web interface to a custom port by entering that number in this box provided Choose a number between 1024 and 65535 but do not use the number of any common servic
14. Wireless Router The wireless Router Mode In this mode the device enables multi user to share Internet via DSL Cable Modem The only wired port works as WAN Access Point The wireless access point mode Repeater The wireless Repeater Mode It could extend the range of wireless network Client The Client Mode The computer connected by Ethernet could get access to an AP by Client mode WISP Client Router In this mode the device enables multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP 36 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL 4 6 Network Network MAC Clone LAN Figure 4 8 the Network menu There are three submenus under the Network menu shown in Figure 4 8 WAN MAC Clone and LAN Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 4 6 1 WAN Choose menu Network WAN and then you can configure the IP parameters of the WAN on the screen below 1 If your ISP provides the DHCP service please choose Dynamic IP type and the Router will automatically get IP parameters from your ISP You can see the page as follow Figure 4 9 WAN Connection Type Dynamic IP IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Renew Release WAN port is unplugged MTU Size in bytes 1500 The default is 1500 do not change unless necessary CO Use These DNS Servers Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Ho
15. You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters between 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period 0 Seconds Keep it default if you are not sure minimum is 30 0 means no update WPAWPA2 Enterprise Version Automatic Mi Encryption Automatic v Radius Server IP Radius Port 1812 1 65535 0 stands for default port 1812 Radius Password Group Key Update Period 0 in second minimum is 30 0 means no update O WEP Type Automatic v WEP Key Format Hexadecimal v Key Selected WEP Key Key Type Key 1 Disabled Key 2 Disabled v Key 3 Disabled Key 4 Disabled v Save Figure 8 16 Wireless Security gt Disable Security The wireless security function can be enabled or disabled If disabled the wireless stations will be able to connect the Router without encryption But it s strongly recommended to choose one of the following modes to enable security gt WPA PSK WPA2 Personal It s the WPA WPA2 authentication type based on pre shared passphrase e Version you can choose the version of the WPA PSK security on the drop down list The default setting is Automatic which can select WPA PSK Pre shared key of WPA or WPA2 PSK Pre shared key of WPA automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e Encryption When WPA PSK or WPA is set as the Authentication Type you can select either Automatic or TKIP or AES as Encryption 209 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN
16. Chapter 2 Connecting the Router 2 1 System Requirements Each PC in the LAN needs a working Ethernet Adapter TCP IP protocol must be installed on each PC Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Mozilla Firefox Apple Safari If the device is configured to Wireless Router Access Point mode you also need Broadband Internet Access Service DSL Cable Ethernet One DSL Cable Modem that has an RJ45 connector which is not necessary if the Router is connected directly to the Ethernet 2 2 Installation Environment Requirements Place the Router in a well ventilated place far from any heater or heating vent Place the Router in a location where it can be connected to the various devices as well as to a power source Avoid direct irradiation of any strong light such as sunlight Keep at least 2 inches 5 cm of clear space around the Router Operating Temperature 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F Operating Humidity 10 90 RH Non condensing 2 3 Connecting the Router Before installing the Router please make sure your broadband service provided by your ISP is available If there is any problem please contact with your ISP To connect the Router please follow the steps below 1 2 3 Power off your PC Cable DSL Modem and the Router Locate an optimum location for the Router The best place is usually at the center of your wireless network The place must accord with the Installation Environment Requir
17. Click Modify to edit the rule Click Delete to delete the rule To add modify a Bandwidth Control rule follow the steps below Step 1 Click Add New shown in Figure 4 77 you will see a new screen shown in Figure 4 78 Step 2 Enter the information like the screen shown below Bandwidth Control Rule Settings Enable IP Range R Port Range 3 Protocol All v Min Bandwidth Kbps Max Bandwidth Kbps Egress Bandwidth lao fo 7 Ingress Bandwidth lo 0 Figure 4 78 Bandwidth Control Rule Settings Enable Enable or disable the rule IP Range Interior PC address range If both are blank or 0 0 0 0 the domain is no effective gt Port Range The port range which the Interior PC access the outside PC If all are blank or 0 the domain is no effective gt Protocol Transport layer protocol here there are All TCP UDP 90 TL WR710N MUI tote T A MCL TT gt Egress Bandwidth The max and the min upload speed which through the WAN port default number is 0 gt Ingress Bandwidth The max and the min download speed through the WAN port default number is 0 Step 3 Click the Save button 4 16 IP amp MAC Binding IP amp MAC Binding ARP List Figure 4 79 The IP amp MAC Binding menu There are two submenus under the IP amp MAC Binding menu Binding Setting and ARP List Click any of them and you will be able to scan or configure the cor
18. Ping Traceroute IP Address Domain Name Ping Count 4 1 50 Ping Packet Size 64 4 1472 Bytes Ping Timeout 800 100 2000 Milliseconds E Traceroute Max TTL 20 1 30 Diagnostic Results This device is ready Figure 5 34 Diagnostic Tools gt Diagnostic Tool Check the radio button to select one diagnostic tool e Ping This diagnostic tool troubleshoots connectivity reachability and name resolution to a given host or gateway e Traceroute This diagnostic tool tests the performance of a connection E Note You can use ping traceroute to test both numeric IP address or domain name lf pinging tracerouting the IP address is successful but pinging tracerouting the domain name is not you might have a name resolution problem In this case ensure that the domain name you are specifying can be resolved by using Domain Name System DNS queries gt IP Address Domain Name Type the destination IP address e g 202 108 22 5 or Domain name e g http www tp link com gt Pings Count The number of Ping packets for a Ping connection The default is 4 Ping Packet Size The size of Ping packet The default is 64 gt Ping Timeout Set the waiting time for the reply of each Ping packet If there is no reply in the specified time the connection is overtime The default is 800 132 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR A ETT TLL gt Traceroute Max TTL The max number of hops for
19. Port Triggering ID Trigger Port Trigger Protocol Incoming Ports Incoming Protocol Status Modify Add New Enable A Disable Al Delete All Previous Next Figure 8 40 Port Triggering Once the Router is configured the operation is as follows 1 A local host makes an outgoing connection using a destination port number defined in the Trigger Port field The Router records this connection opens the incoming port or ports associated with this entry in the Port Triggering table and associates them with the local host When necessary the external host will be able to connect to the local host using one of the ports defined in the Incoming Ports field Trigger Port The port for outgoing traffic An outgoing connection using this port will trigger this rule Trigger Protocol The protocol used for Trigger Ports either TCP UDP or All all protocols supported by the Router Incoming Ports The port or port range used by the remote system when it responds to the outgoing request A response using one of these ports will be forwarded to the PC that triggered this rule You can input at most 5 groups of ports or port sections Every group of ports must be set apart with For example 2000 2038 2050 2051 2085 3010 3030 Incoming Protocol The protocol used for Incoming Ports Range either TCP or UDP or ALL all protocols supported by the Router Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled Modif
20. Trigger Port The port for outgoing traffic An outgoing connection using this port will trigger this rule Trigger Protocol The protocol used for Trigger Ports either TCP UDP or All all protocols supported by the Router Incoming Ports The port or port range used by the remote system when it responds to the outgoing request A response using one of these ports will be forwarded to the PC that triggered this rule You can input at most 5 groups of ports or port sections Every group of ports must be set apart with For example 2000 2038 2050 2051 2085 3010 3030 Incoming Protocol The protocol used for Incoming Ports Range either TCP or UDP or ALL all protocols supported by the Router Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To add a new rule follow the steps below 1 2 Click the Add New button the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 4 45 Select a common application from the Common Applications drop down list then the Trigger Port field and the Incoming Ports field will be automatically filled If the Common Applications do not have the application you need enter the Trigger Port and the Incoming Ports manually Select the protocol used for Trigger Port from the Trigger Protocol drop down list either TCP UDP or All Select the protocol used for Incoming Ports from the Incoming Protocol drop down list either TCP or
21. gt Schedule The time period allowed for the PC controlled to access the Internet For detailed information please go to Access Restriction Schedule gt Modify Here you can edit or delete an existing entry To add a new entry please follow the steps below 1 Click the Add New button and the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 8 49 2 Enter the MAC address of the PC e g 00 11 22 33 44 AA you d like to control in the MAC Address of Child PC field Or you can choose the MAC address from the All Address in Current LAN drop down list 3 Give a description e g Allow Google for the website allowed to be accessed in the Website Description field 235 TL WR710N MUI tote T A MCL TITS 4 Enter the allowed domain name of the website either the full name or the keywords e g google in the Allowed Domain Name field Any domain name with keywords in it e g www google com will be allowed 5 Select from the Effective Time drop down list the schedule e g Schedule_1 you want the entry to take effect If there are not suitable schedules for you click the Schedule in red below to go to the Advance Schedule Settings page and create the schedule you need 6 Inthe Status field you can select Enabled or Disabled to enable or disable your entry 7 Click the Save button Click the Enable All button to enable all the rules in the list Click the Disable All button to disable all the rules in the list
22. gt Secondary Connection It s available only for PPPoE Connection If your ISP provides an extra Connection type such as Dynamic Static IP to connect to a local area network then you can check the radio button of Dynamic Static IP to activate this secondary connection e Disabled The Secondary Connection is disabled by default so there is PPPoE connection only This is recommended 198 TL WR710N MUI tote T A A ETA eda TLEL e Dynamic IP You can check this radio button to use Dynamic IP as the secondary connection to connect to the local area network provided by ISP e Static IP You can check this radio button to use Static IP as the secondary connection to connect to the local area network provided by ISP gt Connect on Demand In this mode the Internet connection can be terminated automatically after a specified inactivity period Max Idle Time and be re established when you attempt to access the Internet again If you want your Internet connection keeps active all the time please enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet access disconnects gt Connect Automatically The connection can be re established automatically when it was down gt Time based Connecting The connection will only be established in the period from the start time to the end time both are in HH MM format tf Note Only when you have configured
23. in the configuration utility of the WPS as below and click Connect 109 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL Llora PS 2 Status WPS Network Profile Advanced w This application will guide you through configuring your wireless network Please choose a method to join a wireless network Push the button on my access point or wireless router Enter the PIN of my access point or wireless router enter the PIN of this device into my access point or wireless router PIN 16952898 4 Connect The WPS Configuration Screen of Wireless Adapter GP Note In this example the default PIN code of this adapter is 16952898 as the above figure shown Step 2 Keep the WPS Status as Enabled and click the Add Device button in Figure 5 3 Step 3 Choose Enter the new device s PIN and enter the PIN code take 16952898 for example of the wireless adapter in the field after PIN as shown in the figure below Then click Connect Add A New Device O Enter the new device s PIN PIN 16952898 O Press the button of the new device in two minutes Figure 5 5 Add A New Device Method Three Enter the PIN from my AP Step 1 Get the Current PIN code of the AP in Figure 5 3 each AP has its unique PIN code Here takes the PIN code 12345670 of this AP for example 110 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA A ETT TS Step 2 For the configuration of the wireless adapter please choose Enter the PIN of my
24. otherwise the Router may be damaged The Router will reboot after the upgrading has been finished 187 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR A ETT LTL 7 9 3 Factory Defaults Choose menu System Tools Factory Defaults and you can restore the configurations of the Router to factory defaults on the following screen Factory Defaults Click the following button to reset all configuration settings to their default values Figure 7 29 Restore Factory Default Click the Restore button to reset all configuration settings to their default values gt The default User Name admin gt The default Password admin gt The default IP Address 192 168 0 254 gt The default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 cf Note All changed settings will be lost when defaults are restored 7 9 4 Backup amp Restore Choose menu System Tools Backup amp Restore and then you can save the current configuration of the Router as a backup file and restore the configuration via a backup file as shown in Figure 7 30 Backup amp Restore Configuration Backup Configuration File Browse Figure 7 30 Backup 8 Restore Configuration Click the Backup button to save all configuration settings as a backup file in your local computer To upgrade the Router s configuration follow these instructions e Click the Browse button to locate the update file for the Router or enter the exact path to the Setting
25. 0 means no detect gt Primary DNS Secondary DNS If your ISP does not automatically assign DNS addresses to the Router during login please click Use the following DNS servers check box and enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation of your ISP s primary DNS server If a secondary DNS server address is available enter it as well Click the Save button to save your settings If your ISP provides BigPond Cable connection please select BigPond Cable option Then you should enter the following parameters Figure 4 13 41 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL WAN Connection Type BigPond Cable User Name username Password Auth Server sm server Auth Domain MTU Size in bytes 11500 The default is 1500 do not change unless necessary Connection Mode Connect on Demand Max Idle Time 15 minutes 0 means remain active at all times O Connect Automatically O Connect Manually Max Idle Time 15 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Disconnect Disconnected Figure 4 13 WAN BigPond Cable User Name Password Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP These fields are case sensitive Auth Server Enter the authenticating server IP address or host name Auth Domain Type in the domain suffix server name based on your location MTU Size The default MTU size is 1480 bytes which is usually fine It is not re
26. Chapter 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 Chapter 3 3 1 3 2 Chapter 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 CONTENTS a daa dali 1 INTO UICN iaa pidas 2 Overview or the Route 2 CONMVEMUOMS ee iio teeta ty 3 Malmkcatlres ia a 3 Panel Layos ios let Aina 3 Connecting the ROUtOTF ocomnnncccnnninccccnnanccncnnancnn cnc nn rca crean 5 system R quirements 10 lt 5 Installation Environment Requirement oooocccccccccccccocononononnnccnonnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 5 Connecting the Route di 5 2 3 1 Wireless Router Mode cidos ani ani ete 6 2 3 2 Access Point MOd v2 2 222 c0cteec 4 sado idea tienta 6 2 3 3 Repeater Mode iso o aa aaa paee aa a Rae Eae aeae aE 7 2 34 CEE MOIO 2 0 3 5 de 7 2 3 5 WISP Client Router Mode asek iiA E REEERE AEREE AAEREN ERRE ran 8 Quick Installation Guide ccecccceeeceseceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesenneeeeeeeeseeseseeeseeneeeseeeeesnaeeneeeesennes 9 TOPIF Configuration iscsi ad hetn A E ao oneal dae eae 9 Quick Installation Guide comisaria oia depen 12 3 21 Wireless Router Moda ii A A dead 13 3 2 2 Access Pot Mod iii A dieta 19 3 23 Repeater Mode iii aie en ead 21 3 2 4 Client MOde ecrire einion ia Da add ob ade 23 3 2 5 WISP Client Router MOGE Kiepskie r g EEE E AEAEE 25 Configuration for Wireless Router Mode ssssssusssennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 29 OG Mess paises Bac vee E 29 UALS 5 225 2 ised a a ETETE T EEE E 29 QUICK SUP id ieee teat anton eed e
27. Choose according to the AP s security configuration It is recommended that the security type is the same as your AP s security type WEP Index Choose if the key type is WEP ASCII or WEP HEX It indicates the index of the WEP key Auth Type Choose if the key type is WEP ASCII or WEP HEX It indicates the authorization type of the Root AP Password Fill the password in this blank if the AP your Router is going to connect needs password Local SSID Enter a value of up to 32 characters The same Name SSID must be assigned to all wireless devices in your network Enable Wireless Router Radio The wireless radio of the Router can be enabled or disabled to allow wireless stations access If enabled the wireless stations will be able to access the Router Otherwise wireless stations will not be able to access the Router Enable SSID Broadcast If you select the Enable SSID Broadcast checkbox the wireless router will broadcast its name SSID on the air Disable Local Wireless Access If you select the Disable Local Wireless Access checkbox the wireless router will disable local wireless access other stations will not be able to access the Router by wireless 208 TL WR710N PWT totes Cla oN Cle Vem AY MCL TT 8 6 2 Wireless Security Wireless Security Disable Security WPAWPA2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Recommended Y Encryption Automatic Recommended Y Wireless Password
28. Click Add New User button and the screen will appear as shown in Figure 8 35 Self define a User Name Enter the password in the Password field Choose the Storage Authority from the drop down list Read and Write or Read Only Add or Modify User Account User Name l admin2 Password admin Storage Authority Read and Write v Figure 8 36 Add or Modify User Account User Name Type the user name that you want to give access to the USB drive The user name must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length Password Enter the password in the Password field The password must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length For security purposes the password for each user account is not displayed 223 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS gt Storage Authority Choose Read and Write or Read Only from the drop down list to assign access authority of Storage Sharing to the user gt Save You can click the Save button to save your settings gt Back You can click the Back button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page E Note Please restart the service for the new settings to take effect If you cannot use the new user name and password to access the shares press Windows logo R to open the Run dialog box and type net use 192 168 0 254 delete yes and press Enter 192 168 0 254 is you
29. Click Modify or Delete as desired on the Modify column To find an existing entry 1 2 Click the Find button shown in Figure 4 80 Enter the MAC Address or IP Address Enter the Find button in the next page shown in Figure 4 82 Find IP amp MAC Binding Entry MAC Address IP Address ID MAC Address IP Address Bind Link 1 00 04 EB 00 07 BE 192 168 0 173 To page Figure 4 82 Find IP amp MAC Binding Entry 92 TL WR710N MUI kote T A MCL TITS Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries 4 16 2 ARP List To manage the computer you could observe the computers in the LAN by checking the relationship of MAC address and IP address on the ARP list and you could configure the items on the ARP list also This page displays the ARP List it shows all the existing IP amp MAC Binding entries ARP List ID MAC Address IP Address Status Configure 1 6C 62 6D F7 31 8D 192 168 0 100 Unbound Load Delete 2 00 0A EB 00 07 BE 192 168 0 173 Bound Load Delete Bind All Load All Refresh Figure 4 83 ARP List gt MAC Address The MAC address of the controlled computer in the LAN gt IP Address The assigned IP address of the controlled computer in the LAN gt Status Enabled or Disabled of the MAC address and IP address binding gt Configure Load or delete item gt Load Load the item to the
30. Click the Rescan button to start a new scan Follow the instructions below to set up your router as a file server 1 a FF YW N Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router Click the Rescan button to find the USB drive that has been attached to the router Click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service Click the Enable button under Shared to enable the disk to share Click the Open the disk to visit the sharing disk Note The router can automatically locate new USB drive But to display the information about your USB device you need to click the Rescan button manually The new settings will not take effect until you restart the service To unplug the USB drive click Eject Disk button first Simply pulling USB drive out of the USB port can cause damage to the device and loss of data Mounted volumes of each USB port are subject to the 8 volume limit So you cannot access more than 8 volumes on the USB storage device If you change the storage settings during the storage connection is established then the changes will not take effect until the router or the client is rebooted 155 TL WR710N MUI totes T A AN ETA IL TLL 6 8 2 Media Server Choose menu USB Settings Media Server you can create media server that allows you to share stored content with other computers and devices on your home network and on the Internet Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_0
31. Control rules in the screen below 248 gt gt TL WR710N MUI LTS NIT AR AN ETT LTL Bandwidth Control Rule List Egress Bandwidth Kbps Ingress Bandwidth Kbps Description Modify Om w m me The current listis empty Add New Delete All Previous Next Current No 1 v Page Figure 8 73 Bandwidth Control Rule List Description This is the information about the rules such as address range Egress Bandwidth This field displays the max and mix upload bandwidth through the WAN port the default is 0 Ingress Bandwidth This field displays the max and mix download bandwidth through the WAN port the default is 0 Enable This displays the status of the rule Modify Click Modify to edit the rule Click Delete to delete the rule To add modify a Bandwidth Control rule follow the steps below Step 1 Click Add New shown in Figure 8 73 you will see a new screen shown in Figure 8 74 Step 2 Enter the information like the screen shown below Bandwidth Control Rule Settings Enable IP Range R Port Range 3 Protocol All v Min Bandwidth Kbps Max Bandwidth Kbps Egress Bandwidth lao fo 7 Ingress Bandwidth lo 0 Figure 8 74 Bandwidth Control Rule Settings Enable Enable or disable the rule IP Range Interior PC address range If both are blank or 0 0 0 0 the domain is no effective gt Port Range The port rang
32. Mounted volumes of each USB port are subject to the 8 volume limit So you cannot access more than 8 volumes on the USB storage device If you change the storage settings during the storage connection is established then the changes will not take effect until the router or the client is rebooted 8 8 2 Media Server Choose menu USB Settings Media Server you can create media server that allows you to share stored content with other computers and devices on your home network and on the Internet 220 TL WR710N MUI tole T A MCL CIL TLEL Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 8 31 Media Server Setting gt Server Name The name of this Media Server gt Server Status Indicates the Media Server s current status started or stopped You can click the Start button to start the Media Server and click the Stop button to stop it gt Name The display name of this folder gt File System The file system type on the partition can be FAT32 or NTFS gt Folder The real full path of the specified folder gt Delete You can delete the share folder by click Delete To set up your media server please follow the instructions below 1 Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 8 32 Med
33. Region United Kingdom v Mode 11bgn mixed v Channel Width Auto v Channel Auto he Enable Wireless Router Radio Enable SSID Broadcast Save Figure 4 19 Wireless Settings Router gt Wireless Network Name Enter a string of up to 32 characters The same name of SSID Service Set Identification must be assigned to all wireless devices in your network The default SSID is set to be TP LINK_XXXXXX XXXXXX indicates the last unique six numbers of each Routers MAC address But it is recommended strongly that you change your networks name SSID to a different value This value is case sensitive For example TEST is NOT the same as fest gt Region Select your region from the pull down list This field specifies the region where the wireless function of the Router can be used It may be illegal to use the wireless function of 48 TL WR710N MUI keto T A AN ETA CIL TLL the Router in a region other than one of those specified in this field If your country or region is not listed please contact your local government agency for assistance gt Mode Select the desired mode The default setting is 11bgn mixed e 11bg mixed Select if you are using both 802 11b and 802 11g wireless clients e 11bgn mixed Select if you are using a mix of 802 11b 11g and 11n wireless clients When 11bg mixed mode is selected only 11bg mixed wireless stations can connect to the Router It is strongly recommended that y
34. Shared volume 1 96B 1 36B 626 MB 67 Eject Disk Rescan Figure 4 33 Storage Sharing gt Service Status Indicates the Network Sharing service s current status You can click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service and click the Stop button to stop it gt Volume The volume name of the USB drive the users have access to Volume 1 8 is mapping to USB port1 and Volume 9 16 is mapping to USB port2 gt Capacity The storage capacity of the USB driver gt Used The used space of the USB driver gt Free The available space of the USB driver gt Use The percentage of the used space gt Shared Indicates the shared or non shared status of the volume When the volume is shared you can click the Disable to stop sharing the volume when volume is non shared you can click the Enable button to share the volume Click the Start button to start the Network Sharing service Click the Stop button to stop the Network Sharing service Click the Eject Disk button to safely remove the USB storage device that is connected to USB port This takes the drive offline A message as shown in Figure 4 34 will appear on your web browser when it is safe to detach the USB disk 60 Message from webpage O This operation will disable Media Server Are you sure to continue Figure 4 34 Safe Unplug Message Click the Rescan button to start a new scan Follow the instructions below to set up your ro
35. access point or wireless router in the configuration utility of the WPS as below and enter the PIN code of the AP into the field after Access Point PIN Then click Connect ae a y Status WPS Network Profile Advanced w This application will guide you through configuring your wireless network Please choose a method to join a wireless network Push the button on my access point or wireless router 9 Enter the PIN of my access point or wireless router Enter the PIN of this device into my access point or wireless router Connect The WPS Configuration Screen of Wireless Adapter c Note The default PIN code of the AP can be found in its label or the WPS configuration screen as Figure 5 3 You will see the following screen when the new device has successfully connected to the network Add A New Device O Enter the new device s PIN PIN Press the button of the new device in two minutes Connect successfully Figure 5 6 Note 1 The WPS LED on the AP will light green for five minutes if the device has been successfully added to the network 2 The WPS function cannot be configured if the Wireless function of the AP is disabled Please make sure the Wireless function is enabled before configuring the WPS 111 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT TS 5 5 Working Mode The Router supports five operation mode types Wireless Router Access Point Repeater Clie
36. technology and operating in the unlicensed radio spectrum at 2 4GHz and WEP encryption for security 802 11b networks are also referred to as Wi Fi networks gt 802 11g specification for wireless networking at 54 Mbps using direct sequence spread spectrum DSSS technology using OFDM modulation and operating in the unlicensed radio spectrum at 2 4GHz and backward compatibility with IEEE 802 11b devices and WEP encryption for security gt DDNS Dynamic Domain Name System The capability of assigning a fixed host and domain name to a dynamic Internet IP Address gt DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A protocol that automatically configure the TCP IP parameters for the all the PC s that are connected to a DHCP server gt DMZ Demilitarized Zone A Demilitarized Zone allows one local host to be exposed to the Internet for a special purpose service such as Internet gaming or videoconferencing gt DNS Domain Name System An Internet Service that translates the names of websites into IP addresses gt Domain Name A descriptive name for an address or group of addresses on the Internet gt DSL Digital Subscriber Line A technology that allows data to be sent or received over existing traditional phone lines gt ISP Internet Service Provider A company that provides access to the Internet gt MTU Maximum Transmission Unit The size in bytes of the largest packet that can be transmitted
37. will be able to configure the corresponding function 8 10 1 Basic Security Choose menu Security Basic Security you can configure the basic security in the screen as shown in Figure 8 45 Basic Security Firewall SPI Firewall Enable Disable VPN PPTP Passthrough Enable Disable L2TP Passthrough Enable O Disable IPSec Passthrough Enable Disable ALG FTP ALG Enable Disable TFTP ALG Enable Disable H323 ALG Enable Disable RTSP ALG Enable Disable Figure 8 45 Basic Security gt Firewall A firewall protects your network from the outside world Here you can enable or disable the Router s firewall e SPI Firewall SPI Stateful Packet Inspection also known as dynamic packet filtering helps to prevent cyber attacks by tracking more state per session lt validates that the 230 TL WR710N MUI LTS MITIN A AN ETT TS traffic passing through the session conforms to the protocol SPI Firewall is enabled by factory default If you want all the computers on the LAN exposed to the outside world you can disable it gt VPN VPN Passthrough must be enabled if you want to allow VPN tunnels using IPSec PPTP or L2TP protocols to pass through the Router s firewall e PPTP Passthrough Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP allows the Point to Point Protocol PPP to be tunneled through an IP network To allow PPTP tunnels to pass through the Router
38. 00 0A EB BO 00 0B 2 Give a simple description for the wireless station in the Description field For example Wireless station A 3 Select Enabled or Disabled for this entry on the Status pull down list 4 Click the Save button to save this entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Disable All button to make all entries disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page Click the Previous button to return to the previous page For example If you desire that the wireless station A with MAC address 00 0A EB BO0 00 0B and the wireless station B with MAC address 00 0A EB 00 07 5F are able to access the Router but all the other wireless stations cannot access the Router you can configure the Wireless MAC Address Filtering list by following these steps 1 Click the Enable button to enable this function 2 Select the radio button Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the list to access for Filtering Rules 3 Delete all or disable all entries if there are any entries already 212 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL 4 Click the Add New button 1 N Enter wireless station A B in the Description field
39. 16952898 as the above figure shown Step 2 Keep the WPS Status as Enabled and click the Add Device button in Figure 4 3 Step 3 Choose Enter the new device s PIN and enter the PIN code take 16952898 for example of the wireless adapter in the field after PIN as shown in the figure below Then click Connect 34 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA A e ETT TLEL Add A New Device O Enter the new device s PIN PIN 16952898 O Press the button of the new device in two minutes Figure 4 5 Add A New Device Method Three Enter the PIN from my AP Step 1 Get the Current PIN code of the AP in Figure 4 3 each AP has its unique PIN code Here takes the PIN code 12345670 of this AP for example Step 2 For the configuration of the wireless adapter please choose Enter the PIN of my access point or wireless router in the configuration utility of the WPS as below and enter the PIN code of the AP into the field after Access Point PIN Then click Connect Ll a s E Status WPS Network Profile Advanced w This application will guide you through configuring your wireless network Please choose a method to join a wireless network Push the button on my access point or wireless router 9 Enter the PIN of my access point or wireless router Enter the PIN of this device into my access point or wireless router Connect The WPS Configuration Screen of Wireless Adapter ce Note The default
40. 20 minutes 1 2880 minutes the default value is 120 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 Optional Default Domain Optional Primary DNS 192 168 0 254 Optional Secondary DNS 92 168 0 254 Optional Note The DHCP Settings function cannot be configured if you have choosed Smart IP DHCP in Network gt LAN in this situation the device will help you configure the DHCP automaticaly as you need Save Figure 5 20 DHCP Settings 5 8 2 DHCP Client List Choose menu DHCP DHCP Clients List and then you can view the information about the clients attached to the Router in the screen as shown in Figure 5 21 123 TL WR710N MUITO ETA ILa cls DHCP Client List ID Client Name MAC Address Assigned IP Lease Time 1 tplink14129 6C 62 6D F7 31 8D 192 168 0 100 01 15 47 2 Unknown 70 73 CB 1F C8 C9 192 168 0 101 01 56 32 Figure 5 21 DHCP Client List gt Client Name The name of the DHCP client gt MAC Address The MAC address of the DHCP client gt Assigned IP The IP address that the Router has allocated to the DHCP client gt Lease Time The time of the DHCP client leased After the dynamic IP address has expired a new dynamic IP address will be automatically assigned to the user You cannot change any of the values on this page To update this page and to show the current attached devices click the Refresh button 5 8 3 Address Reservation Choose menu DHCP Address Rese
41. 50653n WR710N v2 00000000 00 1D 0F 01 06 30 192 168 0 254 255 255 255 0 Wireless Router Enable TP LINK_010630 11bgn mixed Automatic Auto Current channel 1 00 1D 0F 01 06 30 Disable 00 1D 0F 01 06 31 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Received 0 0 0 days 02 45 55 Dynamic IP WAN port is unplugged Sent Figure 4 2 Firmware Version The version information of the Router s firmware Hardware Version The version information of the Router s hardware LAN This field displays the current settings or information for the LAN you can configure them in the Network gt LAN page e MAC Address The physical address of the Router as seen from the LAN e P Address The LAN IP address of the Router 30 TL WR710N MUI LTS MI TINA AN ETT TLL e Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with LAN IP address gt Wireless This field displays basic information or status for wireless function you can configure them in the Wireless gt Wireless Settings page e Working Mode The current wireless working mode in use Wireless Radio Indicates whether the wireless radio feature of the AP is enabled or disabled Name SSID The SSID of the AP e Mode The current wireless mode which the Router works on Channel Width The current wireless channel width in use Channel The current wireless channel in use e MAC Address The physical address of the Router as seen
42. ETT TLL 3 Note If you check the WPA WPA2 Personal radio button and choose TKIP encryption you will find a notice in red as shown in Figure 8 17 WPA MWPA2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Recommended y Encryption TKIP de Wireless Password You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters between 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period 0 Seconds Keep it default if you are not sure minimum is 30 0 means no update We do not recommend using the TKIP encryption if this device operates in 802 11n mode due to the fact that TKIP is not supported by 802 11n specification Figure 8 17 WPA WPA2 Enterprise It s based on Radius Server e Version you can choose the version of the WPA security from the pull down list The default setting is Automatic which can select WPA Wi Fi Protected Access or WPA2 WPA version 2 automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e Encryption You can select Automatic TKIP or AES e Radius Server IP Enter the IP address of the Radius server Radius Port Enter the port that Radius server used e Radius Password Enter the password for the Radius server e Group Key Update Period Specify the group key update interval in seconds The value should be 30 or above Enter 0 to disable the update WEP It is based on the IEEE 802 11 standard e Type you can choose the type for the WEP security on the pull down li
43. Figure 3 5 and then Wireless page will appear as shown in Figure 3 15 Quick Setup Wireless Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish AP Mode Setting Wireless Network Name SSID TP LINK_010630 le also called SSID Region United Kingdom E Channel Auto i Mode 11bgn mixed w Channel Width Auto Wireless Security Mode Most Secure WPA WPA2 PSK x Wireless Password 05059041 Figure 3 15 Quick Setup Wireless gt Wireless Network Name Enter a string of up to 32 characters The same name of SSID Service Set Identification must be assigned to all wireless devices in your network The default SSID is set to be TP LINK_XXXXXX XXXXXX indicates the last unique six numbers of each Routers MAC address But it is recommended strongly that you change your networks name SSID to a different value This value is case sensitive For example TEST is NOT the same as test gt Region Select your region from the pull down list This field specifies the region where the wireless function of the Router can be used It may be illegal to use the wireless 19 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL function of the Router in a region other than one of those specified in this field If your country or region is not listed please contact your local government agency for assistance gt Channel This field determines which operating frequency will be used The
44. Fore entries are before hind entries Enter the ID number in the first box you want to move and another ID number in second box you want to move to and then click the Move button to change the entry s order Click the Next button to go to the next page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Add Internet Access Control Entry Rule Name Host p Click Here To Add New Host List Target Any Target Y click Here To Add New Target List Schedule Anytime V Click Here To Add New Schedule Status Enabled Y Save Back Figure 4 58 Add or Modify Internet Access Restriction Entry For example If you desire to allow the host with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA to access www google com only from 18 00 to 20 00 on Saturday and Sunday and forbid other hosts in the LAN to access the Internet you should follow the settings below 1 Click Access Control Host in the left to enter the Host Settings page Add a new entry with the Host Description is Host_1 and MAC Address is 00 11 22 33 44 AA Click Access Control Target in the left to enter the Target Settings page Add a new entry with the Target Description is Target_1 and Domain Name is www google com Click Access Control Schedule in the left to enter the Schedule Settings page Add a new entry with the Schedule Description is Schedule_1 Day is Sat and Sun Start Time is 1800 and Stop Time is 2000 Click
45. Internet connection to remain active at all times enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes that you wish to have the Internet connecting last unless a new link is requested Caution Sometimes the connection cannot be disconnected although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background Click the Save button to save your settings 203 6 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS If your ISP provides PPTP connection please select PPTP Russia PPTP option And you should enter the following parameters Figure 8 11 WAN Connection Type PPTP Russia PPTP iv User Name username Password sa saeeee Disconnect Disconnected Dynamic IP O Static IP Server IP Address Name IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 DNS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Internet IP Address 0 0 0 0 Internet DNS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MTU Size in bytes 1420 The default is 1420 do not change unless necessary Max Idle Time 15 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Connection Mode Connect on Demand Connect Automatically O Connect Manually Save Figure 8 11 WAN PPTP Russia PPTP gt User Name Password Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP These fields are case sensitive gt Dynamic IP Static IP Choose either as you are given by your ISP and ente
46. Router s hardware Wired This field displays the current settings or information for the LAN you can configure them in the Network gt LAN page e MAC address The physical address of the Router as seen from the LAN e IP address The LAN IP address of the Router e Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with LAN IP address Wireless This field displays basic information or status for wireless function you can configure them in the Wireless gt Wireless Settings page e Working Mode The current wireless working mode in use e Wireless Name of Root AP The SSID of Root AP e Channel The current wireless channel in use e Mode The current wireless mode which the Router works on 139 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA A ETT TLL e Channel Width The current wireless channel width in use e MAC Address The physical address of the Router as seen from the WLAN gt Traffic Statistics The Router s traffic statistics e Received Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been received out from the WAN port e Received Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been received out from the WAN port Sent Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been sent out from the WAN port e Sent Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been sent out from the WAN port gt System Up Time The length of the time since the Router was last powered on or reset Click the Refresh button to get the latest status and settin
47. Router without encryption But it s strongly recommended to choose one of the following modes to enable security WPA PSK WPA2 Personal It s the WPA WPA2 authentication type based on pre shared passphrase e Version you can choose the version of the WPA PSK security on the drop down list The default setting is Automatic which can select WPA PSK Pre shared key of WPA or WPA2 PSK Pre shared key of WPA automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e Encryption When WPA PSK or WPA is set as the Authentication Type you can select either Automatic or TKIP or AES as Encryption amp Note If you check the WPA WPA2 Personal radio button and choose TKIP encryption you will find a notice in red as shown in Figure 7 9 173 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL WPA WPAZ2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Recommended Encryption TKIP v Wireless Password You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters between 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period 0 Seconds Keep it default if you are not sure minimum is 30 0 means no update We do not recommend using the TKIP encryption if this device operates in 802 11n mode due to the fact that TKIP is not supported by 802 11n specification Figure 7 9 WPA WPA2 Enterprise It s based on Radius Server e Version you can choose the version of the WPA security from the pull down list The default settin
48. Router works on 106 TL WR710N MUI tote T A ETA TT e Channel Width The current wireless channel width in use e MAC Address The physical address of the Router as seen from the WLAN gt Traffic Statistics The Router s traffic statistics e Received Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been received out from the WAN port e Received Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been received out from the WAN port Sent Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been sent out from the WAN port e Sent Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been sent out from the WAN port gt System Up Time The length of the time since the Router was last powered on or reset Click the Refresh button to get the latest status and settings of the Router 5 3 Quick Setup Please refer to Section 3 2 Quick Installation Guide 5 4 WPS WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup can help you to quickly and securely connect to a network This section will guide you to add a new wireless device to an existing network quickly by function The WPS function is only available when the Operation Mode is set to Access Point Select menu WPS you will see the next screen shown in Figure 5 3 WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup WPSStatus Enabled Current PIN 12345670 Restore PIN Gen New PIN C Disable PIN of this Device Add A New Device Add Device Figure 5 3 WPS gt WPS Status To enable or disable the WPS function here
49. Statistics gt Current Statistics Status Enable or Disable The default value is disabled To enable click the Enable button If disabled the function of DoS protection in Security settings will be ineffective gt Packets Statistics Interval The default value is 10 Select a value between 5 and 60 seconds in the pull down list The Packets Statistic interval indicates the time section of the packets statistic gt Sorted Rules Here displays sort as desired Statistics Table IP Address The IP Address displayed with statistics Packet The total amount of packets received and transmitted by the Total router Bytes The total amount of bytes received and transmitted by the router Packets The total amount of packets received and transmitted in the last Packets Statistic interval seconds Bvtes The total amount of bytes received and transmitted in the last y Packets Statistic interval seconds C rrent ICMP Tx The total amount of the ICMP packets transmitted to WAN in the last Packets Statistic interval seconds UDP Tx The total amount of the UDP packets transmitted to WAN in the last Packets Statistic interval seconds The total amount of the TCP SYN packets transmitted to WAN in TCP SYN T vee i the last Packets Statistic interval seconds Click the Save button to save the Packets Statistic interval value Click the Auto refresh checkbox to refresh automatically Click the Refresh button to
50. Storage Sharing users on this page Storage Sharing users can use Internet Explorer to access files on the USB drive There are two default user accounts that can access the Storage Sharing They are Administrator and Guest as shown in Figure 7 23 Administrator has read write access to Storage Sharing and can access FTP Server while Guest has read only access to Storage Sharing and cannot access FTP Server User Account Management Add New User User Name Password Storage Authority Modify admin admin Read and Write yes Edit guest guest Read Only no Edit Figure 7 23 User Account Management Only Administrator can use a Web browser to transfer the files from a PC to the Writable shared volume on the USB drive To add a new user account please follow the steps below 1 Click Add New User button and the screen will appear as shown in Figure 7 23 2 Self define a User Name 3 Enter the password in the Password field 183 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT TS 4 Choose the Storage Authority from the drop down list Read and Write or Read Only Add or Modify User Account User Name admin2 Password admin Storage Authority Read and Write v Save Back Figure 7 24 Add or Modify User Account gt User Name Type the user name that you want to give access to the USB drive The user name must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length gt Passwor
51. The value can t be changed gt IP Address Enter the IP address of your Router in dotted decimal notation factory default 192 168 0 254 gt Subnet Mask An address code that determines the size of the network Normally use 255 255 255 0 as the subnet mask gt IGMP Proxy The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP feature allows your devices in LAN can watch TV ce Note 1 If you change the IP Address of LAN you must use the new IP Address to login to the Router 2 Ifthe new LAN IP Address you set is not in the same subnet with the previous one the IP Address pool in the DHCP server will be configured automatically while the Virtual Server and DMZ Host will not take effect until they are re configured 47 TL WR710N MUI LTS NI TINA A ETT TLL 4 7 Wireless Wireless Wireless Security Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless Advanced Wireless Statistics Figure 4 18 Wireless menu There are five submenus under the Wireless menu shown in Figure 4 18 Wireless Settings Wireless Security Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless Advanced and Wireless Statistics Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 4 7 1 Wireless Settings Choose menu Wireless Wireless Settings and then you can configure the basic settings for the wireless network on this page Wireless Settings Wireless Network Name TP LINK_010630 Also called the SSID
52. There are three wireless security modes supported by the Router WPA WPA2 Personal WPA WPA2 Enterprise and WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy Wireless Security O Disable Security WPAWPA2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Recormmended Encryption Automatic Recommended Y Wireless Password You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters between 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period 0 Seconds Keep it default if you are not sure minimum is 30 0 means no update WPA WPA2 Enterprise Version Automatic vi Encryption Automatic v Radius Server IP Radius Port 1812 1 65535 0 stands for default port 1812 Radius Password Group Key Update Period 0 in second minimum is 30 0 means no update O WEP Type Automatic he WEP Key Format Hexadecimal v Key Selected WEP Key Key Type Key 1 Disabled Key 2 Disabled Key 3 Disabled Key 4 Disabled Save Figure 6 9 Wireless Security gt Disable Security The wireless security function can be enabled or disabled If disabled the wireless stations will be able to connect the Router without encryption But it s strongly recommended to choose one of the following modes to enable security 144 TL WR710N MUI kote T AA ETA TT WPA PSK WPA2 Personal It s the WPA WPA2 authentication type based on pre shared passphrase e Version you can choose the version of the WPA PSK security on the drop down list The defa
53. UDP or All 68 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL 5 Select Enabled in Status field 6 Click the Save button to save the new rule Add or Modify a Port Triggering Entry Trigger Port Trigger Protocol All Incoming Ports Incoming Protocol All Y Status Enabled Common Applications Select One Save Back Figure 4 45 Add or Modify a Port Triggering Entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Disable All button to make all entries disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries c Note 1 When the trigger connection is released the corresponding opening ports will be closed 2 Each rule is allowed to be used only by one host on LAN synchronously The trigger connection of other hosts on LAN will be refused 3 Incoming Port Range cannot overlap each other 4 10 3 DMZ Choose menu Forwarding DMZ and then you can view and configure DMZ host in the screen as shown in Figure 4 46 The DMZ host feature allows one local host to be exposed to the Internet for a special purpose service such as Internet gaming or videoconferencing DMZ host forwards all the ports at the same time Any PC whose port is being forwarded m
54. WPAMWPA2 PSK Figure 3 27 Quick Setup Static IP the search function to select the SSID to join 26 SSID The SSID of the AP your router is going to connect to as a client You can also use gt TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL BSSID The BSSID of the AP your router is going to connect to as a client You can also use the search function to select the BSSID to join Survey Click this button you can survey the AP which runs in the current channel Key type This option should be chosen according to the AP s security configuration It is recommended that the security type is the same as your AP s security type WEP Index This option should be chosen if the key type is WEP ASCII or WEP HEX It indicates the index of the WEP key Auth type This option should be chosen if the key type is WEP ASCII or WEP HEX It indicates the authorization type of the Root AP Password If the AP your router is going to connect needs password you need to fill the password in this blank Local SSID Enter a value of up to 32 characters The same Name SSID must be assigned to all wireless devices in your network Wireless Security Mode You can configure the security settings of your wireless network Wireless Password Input the password of your Local SSID Click Survey button on the Wireless page as shown in Figure 3 24 and then AP List page will appear as shown in Figure 3 28 Find the SSID o
55. a Traceroute connection The default is 20 Click Start to check the connectivity of the Internet The Diagnostic Results page displays the result of diagnosis If the result is similar to the following screen the connectivity of the Internet is fine Diagnostic Results Pinging 202 108 22 5 with 64 bytes of data Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 1 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 2 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 3 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 4 Figure 5 35 Diagnostic Results GP Note Only one user can use this tool at one time Options Number of Pings Ping Size and Ping Timeout are used for Ping function Option Tracert Hops are used for Tracert function 5 10 2 Firmware Upgrade Choose menu System Tools Firmware Upgrade and then you can update the latest version of firmware for the Router on the following screen Firmware Upgrade Firmware Version 3 15 11 Build 131125 Rel 50653n Hardware Version WR710N v2 00000000 Figure 5 36 Firmware Upgrade gt Firmware Version This displays the current firmware version gt Hardware Version This displays the current hardware version The hardware version of the upgrade file must accord with the Router s current hardware version To upgrade the Router s firmware follow these instructions below 1 Download a more recent firmware
56. a o Al ei 32 VR O a r asian lA Mads 32 Working MORE ir a ele eat o 36 EATE a A A A E E I A A E chae 37 AG WAN cuca dt ta IT ae ane 37 4 6 2 MAC Clone scott do 46 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 46 37 LAN caia A a 47 MMS A E E E 48 4 7 1 Wireless Settings tada 48 4 12 Nireless DOCU ana 50 4 7 3 Wireless MAC FllterInd lt aid dada 52 4 14 Wireless Advanced dciccincll ice dani 54 ATO Wireless StatiStiCs cine 55 B al O AE AE EE E A Ed eae eee ae AD de 56 48 1 DACP SOS iii A eee 56 4 8 2 DACP Client Lidia e ee 58 4 9 3 Address RESCMVALIOM fist stccitces iii li tias 58 USBiSCUINOS mio taa ica leia 59 4 9 1 storage Sharing tad AA 60 4 9 2 Media Seier cueca iia n ive enn ie tados 61 4 93 User Accounts asociada ltda do 63 BOnwardinG int AA Ad 65 4 10 17 VITAL SNE a E RE EEE E EA AE EER 65 4 10 2 Port TAJGO sit fists aA EE E AOA OEE AE 67 IN A anea ae ean el Neale esl il a ir ee T 69 4 10 4 UPAP aiaeei ee easter na eee heen ey 70 E cutaspasuissecaateuses E A 71 4 111 BASIC Secu ascii titi detal dotes 71 4 11 2 Advanced Security ccicolo cres ctnicoci ileso lalala 72 ATES Local Management dias 74 4 11 4 Remote Management occcconcccconnoccccnononcconononn cnn nono nn cnn non cnn narrar 75 Parental Control econo cinta dica 76 ACCESS COMO A e ean ain Ace ann at ene 78 APS Al o Ul EEE EEF EET T ATE E TE AE ea scbeadhs annua ae 78 4 132 HOSt it ene AA ed ie 81 SE 222008 eed Seen ee ed A 83 O A
57. aia eee eee 253 8 16 2 Comexe cn DDNS ico dd dida 254 VII 9 16 3 Dyndns org DON Sci hd eee es hea ei 255 eT System TIOE 245 Aaa eas Ae a aie Lakin Ae eee eal 256 SUL THM SOAS ii tna 256 3 11 2 IDIAONOS UC EE E A AE E N E E E E I A 257 B17 Firmware Upgrade irasi aint tii e AREARE SSA E REAR 259 STA Factory Detalle 260 8 17 5 Backup amp Restore ooooooooccocococcooccccccccnonnononcnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn anar mnnnnnnnnnnnannnmnnnnnnno 260 A aan lal ede 261 A oenina rrita aged a ia aTr ia ert ied rend ee aie aed ele 261 9 17 97 oystent LOG cheated tana nated ahi AN 262 8 1759 Statistics A AA AA ads 262 Appendix A FAO Ais bela ee E a ee ees oe i en ie da 264 Appendix B Configuring the PC oommccccnnccccnonncccinnencnnnnnneccn nn inner 269 Appendix C SpecificatiOnS ocoonmonionccccnnnnnnnosccncnncnnnnnnnonncnnn nn cnn nenn cnc nn nn 272 Appendix D GIOS aA aa a ar erT Tarar AAA ae AE Aaaa ALAE Ena aa Aaaa eA aE a aaa oi Eana heraa aean asta 273 VIII TL WR710N MUI LTS NI TINA A ETT TS Package Contents The following items should be found in your package gt One TL WR710N WiFi Pocket Router AP TV Adapter Repeater gt Quick Installation Guide gt One RJ 45 Ethernet Cable gt One Resource CD for TL WR710N WiFi Pocket Router AP TV Adapter Repeater including e User Guide e Other Helpful Information cf Note Make sure that the package contains the above items If any of the listed items is d
58. an external Registrar this function will be disabled automatically gt Add Device You can add a new device to the existing network manually by clicking this button To add a new device If the wireless adapter supports Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS you can establish a wireless connection between wireless adapter and device using either Push Button Configuration PBC method or PIN method 32 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL Note To build a successful connection by WPS you should also do the corresponding configuration of the new device for WPS function meanwhile For the configuration of the new device here takes the Wireless Adapter of our company for example Il By PBC If the wireless adapter supports Wi Fi Protected Setup and the Push Button Configuration PBC method you can add it to the network by PBC with the following two methods Method One Step 1 Keep the WPS Status as Enabled and click the Add Device button in Figure 4 3 then the following screen will appear Add A New Device Enter the new device s PIN PIN rress the button of the new device in two minutes Figure 4 4 Add A New Device Step 2 Choose Press the button of the new device in two minutes and click Connect Step 3 For the configuration of the wireless adapter please choose Push the button on my access point or wireless router in the configuration utility of the WPS as below and click
59. and a dynamic IP address and then your friends can connect to your server by entering your domain 252 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT LTL name no matter what your IP address is Before using this feature you need to sign up for DDNS service providers such as www no ip com www comexe cn or www dyndns org The Dynamic DNS client service provider will give you a password or key 8 16 1 No IP DDNS If the dynamic DNS Service Provider you select is www no ip com the page will appear as shown in Figure 8 80 Service Provider No IP www no ip com v Goto register User Name username Password man Domain Name O Enable DDNS Connection Status DDNS not launching Figure 8 80 No IP DDNS Settings To set up for DDNS follow these instructions 1 Type the User Name for your DDNS account 2 Type the Password for your DDNS account 3 Type the Domain Name you received from dynamic DNS service provider 4 Click the Login button to log in the DDNS service Connection Status The status of the DDNS service connection is displayed here Click Logout to log out the DDNS service E Note If you want to login again with another account after a successful login please click the Logout button then input your new username and password and click the Login button 253 8 16 2 Comexe cn DDNS TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR MCL elena lees If the dynamic DNS Service Provide
60. can search the AP which runs in the environment gt Region Select your region from the pull down list This field specifies the region where the wireless function of the Router can be used It may be illegal to use the wireless function of the Router in a region other than one of those specified in this field If your country or region is not listed please contact your local government agency for assistance 21 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL gt WDS Mode This field determines which WDS Mode will be used It is not necessary to change the WDS Mode unless you notice network communication problems with root AP If you select Auto then Router will choose the appropriate WDS Mode automatically gt Wireless Security Mode This option should be chosen according to the security configuration of the AP you want to access It is recommended that the security type is the same as your AP s security type gt Wireless Password l the AP your router is going to connect need password you need to fill the password in this blank Click Survey button on the Wireless page as shown in Figure 3 18 and then AP List page will appear as shown in Figure 3 19 Find the SSID of the Access Point you want to access and click Connect in the corresponding row For example the third item is selected The target network s SSID will be automatically filled into the corresponding box which is shown as the Figure 3 18 AP List AP Coun
61. click Connect in the corresponding row For example the third item is selected The target network s SSID will be automatically filled into the corresponding box which is shown as the Figure 3 21 AP List AP Count 16 pps pe ooa ett feo CTI M Y ps e pone nes 4 4c 60 DE 32 63 8 P LINK_18F710 3048 PA2 PSK B 14 E6 E4 E3 87 64 P LINK_TEST 1648 6 o o PA2 PSK Back Refresh Figure 3 22 AP List Click the Next button in Figure 3 23 You will then see the Finish page Click the Reboot button to make your wireless configuration take effect and finish the Quick Setup Quick Setup Finish Congratulations This device is now connecting you to the Internet For detail settings please click other menus if necessary The change of working mode config will not take effect until this device reboot Figure 3 23 Quick Setup Finish 24 3 2 5 When steps TL WR710N MUI LTS NI TINA AN ETT TLL WISP Client Router Mode you choose WISP Client Router on Working Mode page in Figure 3 5 take the following 1 Click Next and then WAN Connection Type page will appear as shown in Figure 3 24 Quick Setup WAN Connection Type Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt WAN Connection Type gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish The Quick Setup is preparing to set up your connection type of WAN port The Router will try to detect the Internet connection type your ISP provides if you select the Auto Det
62. click the Previous button to return the previous page E Note This page will be refreshed automatically every 5 seconds 5 8 DHCP DHCP Client List Address Reservation Figure 5 18 The DHCP menu There are three submenus under the DHCP menu shown in Figure 5 18 DHCP Settings DHCP Client List and Address Reservation Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 5 8 1 DHCP Settings Choose menu DHCP DHCP Settings and then you can configure the DHCP Server on the page as shown in Figure 5 19 The Router is set up by default as a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server which provides the TCP IP configuration for all the PC s that are connected to the Router in the LAN DHCP Server Disable Enable Start IP Address 192 168 0 100 End IP Address 192 168 0 199 Address Lease Time 120 minutes 1 2880 minutes the default value is 120 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 optional Default Domain optional Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 optional Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 optional Figure 5 19 DHCP Settings gt DHCP Server Enable or Disable the DHCP server If you disable the Server you must have another DHCP server within your network or else you must configure the computer manually 122 TL WR710N MUI TS T A ETA TT TLL gt Start IP Address Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to start with when assigning
63. dies ei ae ae ee ee eria EEA REAY 85 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 Chapter 5 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 Advanced ROUMO aae A EEEE OEA Sean ada ean ER 87 4 14 1 Static Routing Uetersen E AER 87 4 14 2 System Routing Table srir aaa ei RA anaa ARAA NAA AEAT RA 88 Bandwidth Control sienen eiae erda aae ia NANNE EEA AA ORKAAN TAEAE 89 4 191 Control Settings titan dd 89 4152 Rule Listin raid todas iid ni 89 PAUMA C Bd a A A AO 91 4 16 11 Binding Setting ida 91 4 16 2 ARPS ista ai ae ee eet 93 Dynamic DNS 0000 poet aaa os eee ib A AD e Ta 93 44 74 NoAlP DDNS vinci ene eae ee le 94 4 1 2 Gomexe cn DONS vc iia lindaa adas 94 4 1 3 Dyno org DDNS ccoo iaa ladera 95 Systemi Tools vance ae AA ee ee a a 96 44817 Time Settings ist geist eee Silvio ee ie 97 A 18 2 DIAQNOSUIC 12 4 te ais iv asain A A ih 98 4 198 3 Firmware Upgrade c fc2555 E N E ode idad 99 AeA Factory DeTaultS 225 Actates E E REA TOR fie nade tee 100 4 518 5 Backup amp Restore h isc ceed a a a ea a a aei a iaa 101 4 18 6 O ee 101 4 18 4 sPASSWOIG 3s soacieswnts chee itinere 102 4 1858 System LOG ericsson ER 102 4 18 9 Statistical itinere 103 Configuration for Access Point Mode cccssescseseeeceesseneeseneeeesnsesneeeesesneeseseesnenens 105 OM stan 105 Salsa cit tia it ida dol dolia ile 105 Quick Setup air idos 107 WPS pis AAA A A ee ee 107 Working Modes coito tra ei 112 NetWork tive aes dae elt ea al ee a is een 1
64. dynamic DNS service provider here Click the Login button to log in to the DDNS service Connection Status The status of the DDNS service connection is displayed here Click Logout to logout of the DDNS service 255 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL 8 17 System Tools System Tools Diagnostic Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Backup amp Restore Reboot Password System Log Statistics Figure 8 83 The System Tools menu There are nine submenus under the System Tools menu Time Settings Diagnostic Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Backup and Restore Reboot Password System Log and Statistics Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below 8 17 1 Time Settings You can set time manually or get GMT from the Internet for the router on this page Time Settings Time zone GMT Greenwich Mean Time Dublin London v Date 11 1 2013 umoo Time 1 40 22 HH MM SS NTP Server 1 0 0 0 0 Optional NTP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Optional J Enable Daylight Saving Start 2013 End 2013 Daylight Saving Status Note Click the GET GMT to update the time from the internet with the pre defined servers or entering the customized server IP Address or Domain Name in the above frames Figure 8 84 Time Settings
65. entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable Disable All button to make all entries enabled disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page and Click the Previous button to return the previous page 5 9 USB Settings USB Settings Media Server User Accounts Figure 5 24 The USB Settings menu There are three submenus under the USB Settings menu shown in Figure 5 24 Storage Sharing Media Server and User Accounts Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions 5 9 1 Storage Sharing Choose menu USB Settings Storage Sharing you can configure a USB disk drive attached to the router and view volume and share such properties as share name capacity used space and free space on this page as shown below 125 TL WR710N MUI kote T A MCL TT Storage Sharing Service Status Started C Access shared storage with password Volume Capacity Used Free Use Shared volume 1 96B 1 36B 626 MB 67 Eject Disk Rescan Figure 5 25 Storage Sharing gt Service Status Indicates the Network Sharing service s current status You can click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service and click the Stop button to stop it gt Volume The volume name of the USB drive the users have access to Vo
66. example is in Windows XP Open a command prompt and type ping 192 168 0 254 and then press Enter gt If the result displayed is similar to the Figure 3 1 it means the connection between your PC and the Router has been established well 10 TL WR710N MIN TAS Adapter Repeater fx Microsoft Windows XP Version 5 1 2606 lt C Copyright 1985 2661 Microsoft Corp C Documents and Settings English gt Ping 192 168 M 254 Pinging 192 168 6 254 with 32 bytes of data 192 168 254 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 64 192 168 6 254 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 64 192 168 8 254 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 64 Reply from 192 168 0 254 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 64 Ping statistics for 192 168 254 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost z loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum ms Maximum Bms Average ms C Documents and Settings English gt _ Figure 3 1 Success result of Ping command gt Ifthe result displayed is similar to the Figure 3 2 it means the connection between your PC and the Router has failed lof x Microsoft Windows XP Version 5 1 2606 lt C gt Copyright 1985 2661 Microsoft Corp C Documents and Settings English gt ping 192 168 M 254 192 168 9 254 with 32 bytes of data timed out timed out timed out timed out Ping statistics for 192 168 254 Packets Sent 4 Received Lost 4 10 z loss C Documents and Settings English gt F
67. file in the text box e Click the Restore button 188 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT TLL Note The current configuration will be covered by the uploading configuration file The upgrade process lasts for 20 seconds and the Router will restart automatically Keep the Router on during the upgrading process to prevent any damage 7 9 5 Reboot Choose menu System Tools Reboot and then you can click the Reboot button to reboot the Router via the next screen Click this button to reboot this device Figure 7 31 Reboot the Router Some settings of the Router will take effect only after rebooting which include Change the LAN IP Address system will reboot automatically Change the DHCP Settings Change the Wireless configurations Change the Web Management Port Upgrade the firmware of the Router system will reboot automatically Restore the Router s settings to factory defaults system will reboot automatically Vv Vv VW Y V vv Update the configuration with the file system will reboot automatically 189 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL 7 9 6 Password Choose menu System Tools Password and then you can change the factory default user name and password of the Router in the next screen as shown in Figure 7 32 The username and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and must not include any spaces Old User Name Old Password New User Na
68. firmware for the Router on the following screen Firmware Upgrade File Browse Firmware Version 3 15 11 Build 131125 Rel 50653n Hardware Version WR710N v2 00000000 Figure 6 33 Firmware Upgrade gt Firmware Version This displays the current firmware version gt Hardware Version This displays the current hardware version The hardware version of the upgrade file must accord with the Router s current hardware version To upgrade the Router s firmware follow these instructions below 1 Download a more recent firmware upgrade file from the TP LINK website http www tp link com Type the path and file name of the update file into the File field or click the Browse button to locate the update file Click the Upgrade button Note New firmware versions are posted at http www tp link com and can be downloaded for free There is no need to upgrade the firmware unless the new firmware has a new feature you want to use However when experiencing problems caused by the Router rather than the configuration you can try to upgrade the firmware When you upgrade the Router s firmware you may lose its current configurations so before upgrading the firmware please write down some of your customized settings to avoid losing important settings Do not turn off the Router or press the Reset button while the firmware is being upgraded otherwise the Router may be damaged The Router will reb
69. for the application e Protocol The type of protocol the Router opens for the application e Internal Port The Internal port the Router opens for local host e IP Address The IP address of the UPnP device that is currently accessing the Router 70 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL e Status The status of the port is displayed here Enabled means that the port is still active Otherwise the port is inactive Click Refresh to update the Current UPnP Settings List 4 11 Security Security Advanced Security Local Management Remote Management Figure 4 48 The Security menu There are four submenus under the Security menu as shown in Figure 4 48 Basic Security Advanced Security Local Management and Remote Management Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 4 11 1 Basic Security Choose menu Security Basic Security you can configure the basic security in the screen as shown in Figure 4 49 Basic Security Firewall SPI Firewall Enable Disable VPN PPTP Passthrough Enable Disable L2TP Passthrough Enable O Disable IPSec Passthrough Enable Disable ALG FTP ALG Enable Disable TFTP ALG Enable Disable H323 ALG Enable Disable RTSP ALG Enable Disable Figure 4 49 Basic Security gt Firewall A firewall protects your network from the outside world Here you can enable or disable th
70. gt Lease Time The time of the DHCP client leased After the dynamic IP address has expired a new dynamic IP address will be automatically assigned to the user You cannot change any of the values on this page To update this page and to show the current attached devices click the Refresh button 4 8 3 Address Reservation Choose menu DHCP Address Reservation and then you can view and add a reserved address for clients via the next screen shown in Figure 4 30 When you specify a reserved IP address for a PC on the LAN that PC will always receive the same IP address each time when it accesses the DHCP server Reserved IP addresses should be assigned to the servers that require permanent IP settings Address Reservation 1D MAC Address Reserved IP Address Status Modify 1 00 11 22 33 44 AA 192 168 0 169 Enabled Modify Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 4 30 Address Reservation gt MAC Address The MAC address of the PC for which you want to reserve an IP address gt Reserved IP Address The IP address reserved for the PC by the Router gt Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled 58 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL gt Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To Reserve an IP address 1 Click the Add New button Then will pop up 2 Enter the MAC address in XX XX XX XX XX XX format and IP address in dotted deci
71. ida 142 6 60 11 Wireless Settings mitin iia 142 60 2 Wireless Securities RRE 144 6 6 3 Wireless MAG FiNGring cia a 146 IV 6 7 6 8 6 9 Chapter 7 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 6 6 5 Wireless Statisti Ss cai AO a 149 DA CP A AAA at ee eed 150 67 1 DECPSOHINOS oir id Aaa ieee 150 6 1 2 DHCP ClientListiciit id tai 152 6 7 9 Address Reservation cessaire renkte eE enke eee ee tetera iees eoveed eaca eee 152 USB Settings cuidate 154 6 8 1 Storage Sharing icccicicocniccconi caida dd dd 154 6 8 2 Media Server incaico dd dic 156 6 8 3 USO ACCOUNTS dosis arso id dhgecei DEANNA NAANA AAEE Aiar 158 OVS OMT a A A O TA diana 160 6 91 DIAQNOSUC noai O A AEE tari ariel 160 69 2 Elrmware Upgrade ito eae eee eee 162 6 9 3 Factory Defaults yerr dite eee a a A ti een diee stad 163 6 9 4 BBackUp amp Restore eetan heeiehes tr ees eee 163 09 09 ARODOO aos iria clean E ede tee ee 164 09 07 PASS WOTde inicia ti Oia 165 6 97 Systemi A sia decattineaedh nnd SAn nie aennntecctiang ded OEA PEE 166 Configuration for Client Mode cceeccceseeneeseseeeeeeeeeeeseseeneeseseeeeesesesneesesesneeseeeeeenens 167 LO Mirta iaa cialis 167 SAUS e a e da dicta 167 QUICK SUP E RR EE E 169 Working Mode isc AA 169 NeWorkK costar dido 170 To A TO 170 Wireless cortito id o dueto thal oca edo E ados ds 171 ON Wireless Settings idad ada Adis 171 6 2 Wireless ECU iii o 172 A A ee od 175 O Settings ttes ii a
72. is displayed here Click Logout to log out of the DDNS service 4 17 3 Dyndns org DDNS If the dynamic DNS Service Provider you select is www dyndns org the page will appear as shown in Figure 4 86 95 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL Service Provider Dyndns www dyndns org Goto register User Name username Password sssaeee Domain Name O Enable DONS Connection Status DDNS not launching Figure 4 86 Dyndns org DDNS Settings To set up for DDNS follow these instructions 1 Type the User Name for your DDNS account Type the Password for your DDNS account Type the Domain Name you received from dynamic DNS service provider here e oO N Click the Login button to log in to the DDNS service Connection Status The status of the DDNS service connection is displayed here Click Logout to logout of the DDNS service 4 18 System Tools System Tools Diagnostic Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Backup amp Restore Reboot Password System Log Statistics Figure 4 87 The System Tools menu There are nine submenus under the System Tools menu Time Settings Diagnostic Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Backup and Restore Reboot Password System Log and 96 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL Statistics Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function The detailed explana
73. one or two DNS addresses select Use These DNS Servers and enter the primary and secondary addresses into the correct fields Otherwise the DNS servers will be assigned dynamically from your ISP E Note If you find error when you go to a website after entering the DNS addresses it is likely that your DNS servers are set up improperly You should contact your ISP to get DNS server addresses gt Host Name This option specifies the Host Name of the Router gt Get IP with Unicast DHCP A few ISPs DHCP servers do not support the broadcast applications If you cannot get the IP Address normally you can choose this option It is rarely required Click the Save button to save your settings 2 If your ISP provides a static or fixed IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway and DNS setting select Static IP The Static IP settings page will appear as shown in Figure 8 6 WAN Connection Type Static IP x IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 MTU Size in bytes 1500 The default is 1500 do not change unless necessary Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Figure 8 6 WAN Static IP gt IP Address Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation provided by your ISP gt Subnet Mask Enter the subnet Mask in dotted decimal notation provided by your ISP usually is 255 255 255 0 gt Default Gateway Enter the gateway IP address in dotted decimal notation
74. oo00 Optional Figure 8 24 DHCP Settings DHCP Server Enable or Disable the DHCP server If you disable the Server you must have another DHCP server within your network or else you must configure the computer manually Start IP Address Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to start with when assigning IP addresses 192 168 0 100 is the default start address End IP Address Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to end with when assigning IP addresses 192 168 0 199 is the default end address Address Lease Time The Address Lease Time is the amount of time a network user will be allowed connection to the Router with their current dynamic IP Address Enter the amount of time in minutes and the user will be leased this dynamic IP Address After the time is up the user will be automatically assigned a new dynamic IP address The range of the time is 1 2880 minutes The default value is 120 minutes Default Gateway Optional It is suggested to input the IP address of the LAN port of the Router The default value is 192 168 0 254 Default Domain Optional Input the domain name of your network Primary DNS Optional Input the DNS IP address provided by your ISP or consult your ISP Or consult your ISP Secondary DNS Optional Input the IP address of another DNS server if your ISP provides two DNS servers ft Note To use the DHCP server function of the Router you must configure all computers o
75. recommended gt DTIM Interval This value determines the interval of the Delivery Traffic Indication Message DTIM A DTIM field is a countdown field informing clients of the next window for listening to broadcast and multicast messages When the Router has buffered broadcast or multicast messages for associated clients it sends the next DTIM with a DTIM Interval value You can specify the value between 1 255 Beacon Intervals The default value is 1 which indicates the DTIM Interval is the same as Beacon Interval gt Enable WMM WMM function can guarantee the packets with high priority messages being transmitted preferentially It is strongly recommended enabled gt Enable Short GI This function is recommended for it will increase the data capacity by reducing the guard interval time gt Enable AP Isolation This function isolate all connected wireless stations so that wireless stations cannot access each other through WLAN This function will be disabled if WDS Bridge is enabled EP Note If you are not familiar with the setting items in this page it s strongly recommended to keep the provided default values otherwise it may result in lower wireless network performance 4 7 5 Wireless Statistics Choose menu Wireless Wireless Statistics and then you can see the MAC Address Current Status Received Packets and Sent Packets for each connected wireless station Wireless Statistics Current Connected Wireless
76. refresh immediately 263 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA A ETT TLL Appendix A FAQ 1 How do configure the Router to access the Internet by ADSL users 1 First configure the ADSL Modem configured in RFC1483 bridge model 2 Connect the Ethernet cable from your ADSL Modem to the WAN port on the Router The telephone cord plugs into the Line port of the ADSL Modem 3 Log in to the Router click the Network menu on the left of your browser and click WAN submenu On the WAN page select PPPoE Russia PPPoE for WAN Connection Type Type user name in the User Name field and password in the Password field and the Confirm Password field and finish it by clicking Connect WAN Connection Type PPPoE Russia PPPoE v PPPoE Connection User Name Password Confirm Password Figure A 1 PPPoE Connection Type 4 If your ADSL lease is in pay according time mode select Connect on Demand or Connect Manually for Internet connection mode Type an appropriate number for Max Idle Time to avoid wasting paid time Otherwise you can select Auto connecting for Internet connection mode Wan Connection Mode Connect on Demand Max Idle Time 15 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Connect Automatically Time based Connecting Period of Time from o o HH MMto 23 59 HH mm Connect Manually Ma
77. restoring process to prevent any damage 4 18 6 Reboot This page allows you to reboot the router Click this button to reboot this device Figure 4 94 Reboot the router Click the Reboot button to reboot the router Some settings of the router will take effect only after rebooting which include gt gt Change LAN IP Address System will reboot automatically MAC Clone system will reboot automatically DHCP service function Static address assignment of DHCP server 101 TL WR710N MUI kote T A MCL TIL gt Web Service Port of the router gt Upgrade the firmware of the router system will reboot automatically gt Restore the router s settings to factory default system will reboot automatically 4 18 7 Password This page allows you to change the factory default user name and password of the router The username and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and must not include any spaces Old User Name Old Password New User Name New Password Confirm New Password Figure 4 95 Password It is recommended strongly that you change the factory default user name and password of the router All users who try to access the router s Web based utility or Quick Setup will be prompted Note The new user name and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and must not include any spaces Enter the new Password twice to confirm it Cl
78. s MAC Address 6C 62 6D F7 31 8D Clone MAC Address Figure A 3 MAC Clone 3 want to use NetMeeting what do need to do 1 2 If you start NetMeeting as a sponsor you don t need to do anything with the Router If you start as a response you need to configure Virtual Server or DMZ Host and make sure the H323 ALG is enabled How to configure Virtual Server Log in to the Router click the Forwarding menu on the left of your browser and click Virtual Servers submenu On the Virtual Servers page click Add New Then on the Add or Modify a Virtual Server Entry page enter 1720 for the Service Port blank and your IP address for the IP Address blank taking 192 168 0 169 for an example remember to Enable and Save 265 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS Virtual Servers ID Service Port Internal Port IP Address Protocol Status Modify 4 1720 1720 192 168 0 169 All Enabled Modify Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure A 4 Virtual Servers Add or Modify a Virtual Server Entry Service Port o XX XX OF XX Internal Port A XX Only valid for single Service Port or leave it blank IP Address OOOO O Protocol All he Status Enabled v Common Service Port Select One v Figure A 5 Add or Modify a Virtual server Entry E Note Your opposite side should call your WAN IP which is displaye
79. share Click the Open the disk to visit the sharing disk Note The router can automatically locate new USB drive But to display the information about your USB device you need to click the Rescan button manually The new settings will not take effect until you restart the service To unplug the USB drive click Eject Disk button first Simply pulling USB drive out of the USB port can cause damage to the device and loss of data Mounted volumes of each USB port are subject to the 8 volume limit So you cannot access more than 8 volumes on the USB storage device If you change the storage settings during the storage connection is established then the changes will not take effect until the router or the client is rebooted 5 9 2 Media Server Choose menu USB Settings Media Server you can create media server that allows you to share stored content with other computers and devices on your home network and on the Internet Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 5 27 Media Server Setting Server Name The name of this Media Server Server Status Indicates the Media Server s current status started or stopped You can click the Start button to start the Media Server and click the Stop button to stop it Name The display name of this folder File System The file system type on
80. significant performance degradation or inability to wirelessly connect to the Router 28 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT LTL Chapter 4 Configuration for Wireless Router Mode This chapter will show each Web page s key functions and the configuration way for Wireless Router Mode of TL WR710N 4 1 Login After your successful login you can configure and manage the device There are main menus on the left of the web based utility Submenus will be available after you click one of the main menus On the right there are the corresponding explanations and instructions Quick Setup WPS Working Mode Network Wireless DHCP USB Settings Forwarding Security Parental Control Access Control Advanced Routing Bandwidth Control IP amp MAC Binding Dynamic DNS System Tools Figure 4 1 The detailed explanations for each Web page s key function are listed below 4 2 Status The Status page provides the current status information about the Router on Wireless Router Mode All information is read only 29 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA A ETT LTL Firmware Version Hardware Version LAN MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Wireless Working Mode Wireless Radio Name SSID Mode Channel Width Channel MAC Address WDS Status WAN MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway DNS Server Traffic Statistics Bytes Packets System Up Time 3 15 11 Build 131125 Rel
81. the Access Restriction Rule Target Settings 1D Target Description Information Modify Add New Delete All Previous Next Current No 11 v Page Figure 8 60 Target Settings Target Description Here displays the description about the target and this description is unique Information The target can be IP address port or domain name Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To add a new entry please follow the steps below 1 2 Click the Add New button In Mode field select IP Address or Domain Name e Ifyou select IP Address the screen shown is Figure 8 61 1 In Target Description field create a unique description for the target e g Target_1 2 In IP Address field enter the IP address of the target 3 Select a common service from Common Service Port drop down list so that the Target Port will be automatically filled If the Common Service Port drop down list doesn t have the service you want specify the Target Port manually 4 In Protocol field select TCP UDP ICMP or ALL e If you select Domain Name the screen shown is Figure 8 62 1 In Target Description field create a unique description for the target e g Target_1 242 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLEL 2 In Domain Name field enter the domain name either the full name or the keywords for example Google in the blank Any domain name with keywords in it e g www google com will be blocked or allow
82. the DHCP client leased After the dynamic IP address has expired a new dynamic IP address will be automatically assigned to the user You cannot change any of the values on this page To update this page and to show the current attached devices click the Refresh button 7 7 3 Address Reservation Choose menu DHCP Address Reservation and then you can view and add a reserved address for clients via the next screen shown in Figure 7 14 When you specify a reserved IP address for a PC on the LAN that PC will always receive the same IP address each time when it accesses the DHCP server Reserved IP addresses should be assigned to the servers that require permanent IP settings Address Reservation ID MAC Address Reserved IP Address Status Modify 1 00 11 22 33 44 AA 192 168 0 169 Enabled Modify Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 7 14 Address Reservation gt MAC Address The MAC address of the PC for which you want to reserve an IP address gt Reserved IP Address The IP address reserved for the PC by the Router gt Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled 177 gt TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To Reserve an IP address 1 2 Click the Add New button Then Figure 7 15 will pop up Enter the MAC address in XX XX XX XX XX XX format and IP address in dotted decima
83. the radio button Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the list to access for Filtering Rules 3 Delete all or disable all entries if there are any entries already 4 Click the Add New button e Enter the MAC address 00 0A EB B0 00 0B 00 0A EB 00 07 5F in the MAC Address field e Enter wireless station A B in the Description field e Select Enabled in the Status pull down list e Click the Save button e Click the Back button The filtering rules that configured should be similar to the following list Filtering Rules Deny the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the list to access ID MAC Address Status Description Modify 1 00 0A EB B0 00 0B Enabled wireless station A Modify Delete 2 00 0A EB 00 07 5F Enabled wireless station B Modify Delete 6 6 4 Wireless Advanced Choose menu Wireless Wireless Advanced and then you can configure the advanced settings of your wireless network Wireless Advanced Transmit Power High v Beacon Interval 100 40 1000 RTS Threshold 2346 256 2346 Fragmentation Threshold 2346 256 2346 DTIMintervak 1 1 255 Enable WMM Enable Short GI C Enable AP Isolation Figure 6 13 Wireless Advanced gt Transmit Power Here you can specify the transmit power of Router You can select High Middle or Low which you
84. the system time on System Tools Time page will the Time based Connecting function can take effect gt Connect Manually You can click the Connect Disconnect button to connect disconnect immediately This mode also supports the Max Idle Time function as Connect on Demand mode The Internet connection can be disconnected automatically after a specified inactivity period and re established when you attempt to access the Internet again Click the Connect button to connect immediately Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately Caution Sometimes the connection cannot be terminated although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background If you want to do some advanced configurations please click the Advanced button and the page shown in Figure 8 8 will then appear 199 TL WR710N MUI keto T A AN ETA TITS PPPoE Advanced Settings MTU Size in bytes 1480 The default is 1480 do not change unless necessary Service Name AC Name C Use IP Address Specified by ISP ISP Specified IP Address 0 0 0 0 Detect Online Interval 0 Seconds 0 120 seconds the default is 0 0 means not detecting O Use The Following DNS Servers Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Save Back Figure 8 8 PPPoE Advanced Settings gt MTU Size The default MTU size i
85. to Send Threshold If the packet is larger than the specified RTS Threshold size the Router will send RTS frames to a particular receiving station and negotiate the sending of a data frame The default value is 2346 Fragmentation Threshold This value is the maximum size determining whether packets will be fragmented Setting the Fragmentation Threshold too low may result in poor network performance because of excessive packets 2346 is the default setting and is recommended DTIM Interval This value determines the interval of the Delivery Traffic Indication Message DTIM A DTIM field is a countdown field informing clients of the next window for listening to broadcast and multicast messages When the Router has buffered broadcast or multicast 120 TL WR710N MUI tote T N A MCL TT messages for associated clients it sends the next DTIM with a DTIM Interval value You can specify the value between 1 255 Beacon Intervals The default value is 1 which indicates the DTIM Interval is the same as Beacon Interval gt Enable WMM WMM function can guarantee the packets with high priority messages being transmitted preferentially It is strongly recommended enabled gt Enable Short GI This function is recommended for it will increase the data capacity by reducing the guard interval time gt Enable AP Isolation This function isolate all connected wireless stations so that wireless stations cannot access each other throu
86. upgrade file from the TP LINK website http www tp link com 2 Type the path and file name of the update file into the File field or click the Browse button to locate the update file 133 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA A ETT LTL 3 Click the Upgrade button Er e 4 Note New firmware versions are posted at http www tp link com and can be downloaded for free There is no need to upgrade the firmware unless the new firmware has a new feature you want to use However when experiencing problems caused by the Router rather than the configuration you can try to upgrade the firmware When you upgrade the Router s firmware you may lose its current configurations so before upgrading the firmware please write down some of your customized settings to avoid losing important settings Do not turn off the Router or press the Reset button while the firmware is being upgraded otherwise the Router may be damaged The Router will reboot after the upgrading has been finished 5 10 3 Factory Defaults Choose menu System Tools Factory Defaults and you can restore the configurations of the Router to factory defaults on the following screen Factory Defaults Click the following button to reset all configuration settings to their default values Figure 5 37 Restore Factory Default Click the Restore button to reset all configuration settings to their default values gt The default User Name ad
87. upgrading To upgrade the router s firmware follow these instructions 1 Download the latest firmware upgrade file from our website http www tp link com 2 Enter or select the path name where you save the downloaded file on the computer into the File blank Click the Upgrade button gt Firmware Version Displays the current firmware version gt Hardware Version Displays the current hardware version The hardware version of the upgrade file must accord with the current hardware version Note The firmware version must correspond to the hardware The upgrade process takes a few minutes and the Router will restart automatically when the upgrade is completed It is important to keep power on during the entire process Loss of power during the upgrade could damage the Router 259 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT LTL 8 17 4 Factory Defaults This page allows you to restore the factory default settings for the router Factory Defaults Click the following button to reset all configuration settings to their default values Figure 8 88 Restore Factory Default Click the Restore button to reset all configuration settings to their default values gt The default User Name admin gt The default Password admin gt The default access tplinklogin net Note Any settings you have saved will be lost when the default settings are restored 8 17 5 Backup 8 Restore This page allows you to sa
88. would like High is the default setting and is recommended gt Beacon Interval Enter a value between 20 1000 milliseconds for Beacon Interval here The beacons are the packets sent by the Router to synchronize a wireless network Beacon Interval value determines the time interval of the beacons The default value is 100 148 TL WR710N MUI eT A Mel ol ede LTL gt RTS Threshold Here you can specify the RTS Request to Send Threshold If the packet is larger than the specified RTS Threshold size the Router will send RTS frames to a particular receiving station and negotiate the sending of a data frame The default value is 2346 gt Fragmentation Threshold This value is the maximum size determining whether packets will be fragmented Setting the Fragmentation Threshold too low may result in poor network performance because of excessive packets 2346 is the default setting and is recommended gt DTIM Interval This value determines the interval of the Delivery Traffic Indication Message DTIM A DTIM field is a countdown field informing clients of the next window for listening to broadcast and multicast messages When the Router has buffered broadcast or multicast messages for associated clients it sends the next DTIM with a DTIM Interval value You can specify the value between 1 255 Beacon Intervals The default value is 1 which indicates the DTIM Interval is the same as Beacon Interval gt Enable WMM WMM
89. 000000 S Ver 3 15 11 Build 131125 Rel 50653n L 192 168 0 254 M 255 255 255 0 W1 DHCP W 0 0 0 0 M 0 0 0 0 G 0 0 0 0 Mail Log CurrentNo 1 w Page Figure 7 33 System Log gt Refresh Refresh the page to show the latest log list gt Save Log Click to save all the logs in a txt file gt Mail Log Click to send an email of current logs manually according to the address and validation information set in Mail Settings The result will be shown in the later log soon gt Clear Log All the logs will be deleted from this device permanently not just from the page 191 Chapter 8 Configuration for WISP Client Router Mode This chapter will show each Web page s key functions and the configuration way for WISP Client Router Mode of TL WR710N 8 1 Login After your successful login you can configure and manage the device There are main menus on the left of the web based utility Submenus will be available after you click one of the main menus On the right there are the corresponding explanations and instructions Status Quick Setup WPS Working Mode Network Wireless DHCP USB Settings Forwarding Security Parental Control Access Control Advanced Routing Bandwidth Control IP amp MAC Binding Dynamic DNS System Tools Figure 8 1 The detailed explanations for each Web page s key function are listed below 8 2 Status The Status page provides the curren
90. 10628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 6 24 Media Server Setting gt Server Name The name of this Media Server gt Server Status Indicates the Media Server s current status started or stopped You can click the Start button to start the Media Server and click the Stop button to stop it gt Name The display name of this folder gt File System The file system type on the partition can be FAT32 or NTFS gt Folder The real full path of the specified folder gt Delete You can delete the share folder by click Delete To set up your media server please follow the instructions below 1 Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 6 25 Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 6 25 Media Server Setting 156 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL 2 Click the Start button to start the media server and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 6 26 Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Started O Auto scanevery 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 6 26 Media Server Setting 3 Click the Add share folder
91. 10N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLEL E Note The current configuration will be covered by the uploading configuration file The upgrade process lasts for 20 seconds and the Router will restart automatically Keep the Router on during the upgrading process to prevent any damage 6 9 5 Reboot Choose menu System Tools Reboot and then you can click the Reboot button to reboot the Router via the next screen Click this button to reboot this device Figure 6 36 Reboot the Router Some settings of the Router will take effect only after rebooting including Change the LAN IP Address system will reboot automatically Change the DHCP Settings Change the Wireless configurations Change the Web Management Port Upgrade the firmware of the Router system will reboot automatically Restore the Router s settings to factory defaults system will reboot automatically Vv Vv VV VW vv Update the configuration with the file system will reboot automatically 164 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL 6 9 6 Password Choose menu System Tools Password and then you can change the factory default user name and password of the Router in the next screen as shown in Figure 6 37 The username and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and must not include any spaces Old User Name Old Password New User Name New Password Confirm New Password Figure 6 37 Passw
92. 12 SeT EAN a SAO 112 WOOS Snte A EEA t 113 5 8 5 9 5 10 Chapter 6 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 LAT Wireless matting S eni can dein A A A 114 9 2 Wireless DOCU id E E e tee eit 115 5 7 3 Wireless MAC Filtering ooooooconindocoisidcia tirita das ende 118 5 7 4 Wireless Advanced viii dat 120 oo Wireless SlatiStiCs di add 121 DACP rin A A A dd 122 5 83 11 DHCP Settings ii Aide hs aaa Aa aea gah aaa aeaaaee iaia 122 5 8 2 DHCP Client Litunia edie 123 5 8 3 Address ReseivatiON ciutat dd did elect ated 124 USB SONS aid 125 9 9 1 Storage Ma visitan EAE 125 59 2 Media SO o aina E EE EER E E A A EN 127 9 93 USEFACCOUNIS iiaa td td idad 130 System Tolima 131 OOM Diagnostic todas 132 5 10 2 Firmware Upgrade decidi idilio nndr nice de cuendeakesnetcaea nics de oes 133 5 10 3 Eactory Detalla ica nta T e NETO thicedecciptteaderaeteeet inde a meets 134 5 10 4 Backup amp Restore aa ea a ea ee ea aa aa aeaaea aeaa a ani 135 5 10 5 Reboot iia es ON 135 5 10 6 PassWord 2s aat ean aiak ania Aae E AA AEAN Aina NAAN ANANE S ne ETAU EEA AA EE rSn TAEA 136 IES o NEEE E E E A E E 137 Configuration for Repeater Mode oommoncccioniccccnoncccninnnncnnonnnccnnnnnnenrn anne 138 LM A ad 138 MAMA A E A AE EE O I A EET E fe bent sits beatae Mads Set cages 138 aa eTe T e D E E E E Nh A E A O EN 140 WorkinG MOG eaaa a T N EA A T 140 ENa a AROA E E E E dE E T A teenie 141 FaF PAN a AE EE A A T E 141 E E A AA el ee E
93. 2 108 22 5 or Domain name such as www baidu com gt Pings Count The number of Ping packets for a Ping connection 98 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT TS Ping Packet Size The size of Ping packet gt Ping Timeout Set the waiting time for the reply of each Ping packet If there is no reply in the specified time the connection is overtime gt Traceroute Max TTL The max number of hops for a Traceroute connection Click Start to check the connectivity of the Internet The Diagnostic Results page displays the result of diagnosis If the result is similar to the following screen the connectivity of the Internet is fine Diagnostic Results Pinging 202 108 22 5 with 64 bytes of data Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 1 i Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 2 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 3 i Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seg 4 Approxima e round trip times In milliseconds Figure 4 90 Diagnostic Results amp Note Only one user can use this tool at one time Ping Count Ping Packet Size and Ping Timeout are Ping Parameters Traceroute Max TTL is Traceroute Parameter 4 18 3 Firmware Upgrade The page allows you to upgrade the latest version firmware to keep your router up to date Firmware Upgrade File Browse J Firmware Version Hardware Version 3 1
94. 256 TL WR710N PWT eC T A AN ETA TITS gt Time Zone Select your local time zone from this pull down list gt Date Enter your local date in MM DD YY into the right blanks gt Time Enter your local time in HH MM SS into the right blanks To set time manually follow the steps below Select your local time zone Enter the Date in Month Day Year format 1 2 3 Enter the Time in Hour Minute Second format 4 Click Save For automatic time synchronization 1 Enter the address of the NTP Server 1 or NTP Server 2 2 Click the Get GMT button to get GMT time from Internet if you have connected to Internet Note This setting will be used for some time based functions such as firewall You must specify your time zone once you login to the router successfully if not the time limited on these functions will not take effect gt The time will be lost if the router is turned off gt The router will obtain GMT automatically from Internet if it has already connected to Internet 8 17 2 Diagnostic Choose menu System Tools Diagnostic you can transact Ping or Traceroute function to check connectivity of your network in the following screen Diagnostic Tools Diagnostic Parameters Diagnostic Tool Ping Traceroute IP Address Domain Name Ping Count 4 1 50 Ping Packet Size 64 4 1472 Bytes Ping Timeout leoo 100 2000 Milliseconds Traceroute Max TTL 20 1 30 Di
95. 5 11 Build 131125 Rel 50653n WR710N v2 00000000 Figure 4 91 Firmware Upgrade New firmware is posted at www tp link com and can be downloaded for free If the router is not experiencing difficulties there is no need to upgrade firmware unless the new firmware supports a new feature you need 99 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT LTL Note Ts de When you upgrade the router s firmware you will lose current configuration settings so make sure you backup the router s settings before you upgrade its firmware Make sure that your computer is connected to the Internet through the cable when you upgrade the firmware To upgrade through wireless connection is not allowed Set your IP address as static IP before upgrading To upgrade the router s firmware follow these instructions 1 Download the latest firmware upgrade file from our website http www tp link com 2 Enter or select the path name where you save the downloaded file on the computer into the File blank 3 Click the Upgrade button gt Firmware Version Displays the current firmware version gt Hardware Version Displays the current hardware version The hardware version of the upgrade file must accord with the current hardware version Note The firmware version must correspond to the hardware The upgrade process takes a few minutes and the Router will restart automatically when the upgrade is completed It is important to keep p
96. 55 0 W1 DHCP W 0 0 0 0 M 0 0 0 0 G 0 0 0 0 Mail Log CurrentNo 1 w Page Figure 6 38 System Log gt Refresh Refresh the page to show the latest log list gt Save Log Click to save all the logs in a txt file gt Mail Log Click to send an email of current logs manually according to the address and validation information set in Mail Settings The result will be shown in the later log soon gt Clear Log All the logs will be deleted from this device permanently not just from the page 166 TL WR710N MUI LTS II TINA A e ETT TLL Chapter 7 Configuration for Client Mode This chapter will show each Web page s key functions and the configuration way for Client Mode of TL WR710N 7 1 Login After your successful login you can configure and manage the device There are main menus on the left of the web based utility Submenus will be available after you click one of the main menus On the right there are the corresponding explanations and instructions Status Quick Setup Working Mode Network Wireless DHCP USB Settings System Tools Figure 7 1 The detailed explanations for each Web page s key function are listed below 7 2 Status The Status page provides the current status information about the Router on Client Mode All information is read only 167 TL WR710N MUITO NI TINA AN ETT TLEL Firmware Version 3 15 11 Build 131125 Rel 50653n H
97. 57 34 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag 0 166 1st day 02 57 32 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag 0 Time 2013 01 01 3 07 43 11264s H Ver WR710N v2 00000000 S Ver 3 15 11 Build 131125 Rel 50653n L 192 168 0 254 M 255 255 255 0 W1 DHCP W 0 0 0 0 M 0 0 0 0 G 0 0 0 0 Mail Log CurrentNo 1 w Page Figure 8 92 System Log gt Refresh Refresh the page to show the latest log list gt Save Log Click to save all the logs in a txt file gt Mail Log Click to send an email of current logs manually according to the address and validation information set in Mail Settings The result will be shown in the later log soon gt Clear Log All the logs will be deleted from this device permanently not just from the page 8 17 9 Statistics The Statistics page displays the network traffic of each PC in LAN including total traffic and traffic of the last Packets Statistic interval seconds 262 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL Statistics Current Statistics Status Disabled Packets Statistics Interval 5 60 10 w Seconds Auto refresh Sorted Rules Sorted by Current Bytes Y Reset All Delete All Total Current IP Address MAC Address Packets Bytes Packets Bytes ICMP Tx UDP Tx SYN Tx The current listis empty 5 vlentriesperpage CurrentNo 1 v Page L Figure 8 93
98. AN ETT TS LAN MAC Address 00 1 D OF 01 06 28 Type Smart IP DHCP v IP Address 192 168 0 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 IGMP Proxy Enable Note IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol works for IPTY multicast stream The device supports both IGMP proxy with enable or disable option and IGMP snooping Figure 5 9 LAN gt MAC Address The physical address of the LAN ports as seen from the LAN The value can not be changed gt Type Choosing Smart IP DHCP to get IP address from DHCP server or choosing static IP to config IP address manually gt IP Address Enter the IP address of your system in dotted decimal notation factory default 192 168 0 254 gt Subnet Mask An address code that determines the size of the network Normally 255 255 255 0 is used as the subnet mask gt IGMP Proxy The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP feature allows your devices in LAN can watch TV E Note 1 If you change the IP Address of LAN you must use the new IP Address to login to the Router 2 If the new LAN IP Address you set is not in the same subnet with the previous one the IP Address pool in the DHCP server will be configured automatically while the Virtual Server and DMZ Host will not take effect until they are re configured 3 When you choose the Smart IP DHCP mode the DHCP Server function will be disabled 5 7 Wireless Wireless Wireless Security W
99. Add New Delete All Previous Next Current No 1 Page Figure 8 63 Target Settings 8 12 4 Schedule Choose menu Access Control Schedule you can view and set a Schedule list in the next screen as shown in Figure 8 64 The Schedule list is necessary for the Access Restriction Rule Schedule Settings ID Schedule Description Day Time Modify Add New Delete All Prevoius Next Current No 1 v Page Figure 8 64 Schedule Settings gt Schedule Description Here displays the description of the schedule and this description is unique gt Day Here displays the day s in a week gt Time Here displays the time period in a day gt Modify Here you can edit or delete an existing schedule To add a new schedule follow the steps below 1 Click Add New button shown in Figure 8 64 and the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 8 65 2 In Schedule Description field create a unique description for the schedule e g Schedule_1 wo In Day field select the day or days you need 4 In Time field you can select all day 24 hours or you may enter the Start Time and Stop Time in the corresponding field 5 Click Save to complete the settings Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table 244 TL WR710N MUI LTS NI TINA AN ETT LTL Click the Next button to go to the next page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Advance S
100. All previous Next Current No 1 v Page Figure 4 55 4 13 Access Control Access Control Host Target Schedule Figure 4 56 The Access Control menu There are four submenus under the Access Restriction menu as shown in Figure 4 56 Rule Host Target and Schedule Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 4 13 1 Rule Choose menu Access Control Rule you can view and set Access Restriction rules in the screen as shown in Figure 4 57 78 Vv Vv VV WV gt TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL Access Control Rule Management C Enable Internet Access Control Default Filter Policy O Allow the packets specified by any enabled access control policy to pass through the Router E Deny the packets specified by any enabled access control policy to pass through the Router Save ID Rule Name Host Target Schedule Status Modify setup Wizard Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All D mo Previous Next Current No 1 v Page Figure 4 57 Access Control Rule Management Enable Internet Access Control Select the check box to enable the Internet Access Restriction function so the Default Filter Policy can take effect Rule Name Here displays the name of the rule and this name is unique Host Here displays the host selected in the corresponding rule Target Here displays the target selected in the corresponding rule Schedul
101. Automatic which can select Shared Key or Open System authentication type automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e WEP Key Format Hexadecimal and ASCII formats are provided here Hexadecimal format stands for any combination of hexadecimal digits 0 9 a f A F in the specified length ASCII format stands for any combination of keyboard characters in the specified length WEP Key Password Select which of the four keys will be used and enter the matching WEP key that you create Make sure these values are identical on all wireless stations in your network e Key Type You can select the WEP key length 64 bit or 128 bit or 152 bit for encryption Disabled means this WEP key entry is invalid 64 bit You can enter 10 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 5 ASCII characters 128 bit You can enter 26 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 13 ASCII characters 117 TL WR710N MUI eT A MCL TT 152 bit You can enter 32 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 16 ASCII characters E Note If you do not set the key the wireless security function is still disabled even if you have selected Shared Key as Authentication Type 5 7 3 Wireless MAC Filtering Choose menu Wireless Wireless MAC Filtering and then you can control the wireless access by co
102. Choose menu Wireless Wireless MAC Filtering and then you can control the wireless access by configuring the Wireless MAC Filtering function as shown in Figure 8 18 Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless MAC Filtering Enabled Filtering Rules Deny the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access ID MAC Address Status Description Modify Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 8 18 Wireless MAC Filtering To filter wireless users by MAC Address click Enable The default setting is Disabled gt MAC Address The wireless station s MAC address that you want to access gt Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled gt Description A simple description of the wireless station To Add a Wireless MAC Address filtering entry click the Add New button The Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry page will appear shown in Figure 8 19 211 Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry MAC Address Description Status Enabled Y Figure 8 19 Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry To add or modify a MAC Address Filtering entry follow these instructions 1 Enter the appropriate MAC Address into the MAC Address field The format of the MAC Address is XX XX XX XX XX XX X is any hexadecimal digit For example
103. Configuring the PC In this section we ll introduce how to install and configure the TCP IP correctly in Windows XP First make sure your Ethernet Adapter is working refer to the adapter s manual if necessary 1 Configure TCP IP component 1 On the Windows taskbar click the Start button and then click Control Panel 2 Click the Network and Internet Connections icon and then click on the Network Connections tab in the appearing window 3 Right click the icon that showed below select Properties on the prompt page LAN or High Speed Internet ireless Network Connection 49 onnected tp z MP Disable View Available Wireless Networks Status Repair Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Rename Figure B 0 1 269 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL 4 Inthe prompt page that showed below double click on the Internet Protocol TCP IP Wireless Network Connection 49 Properties General Advanced Connect using ES EZ Connect N 150Mbps Wireless N L This connection uses the following items Y 2 00s Packet Scheduler Y YF AEGIS Protocol IEEE 802 1x v3 7 5 0 Internet Protocol TCP IP lt gt Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Show icon in notification area when connected Notify me when this connection has limited or n
104. Connect Status WPS Network Profile Advanced Cy This application will guide you through configuring your wireless network Please choose a method to join a wireless network 9 Push the button on my access point or wireless router Enter the PIN of my access point or wireless router Enter the PIN of this device into my access point or wireless router Connect The WPS Configuration Screen of Wireless Adapter 33 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL Step 4 Wait for a while until the next screen appears Click OK to complete the WPS configuration Configuring the wireless network Successfully connected to the network by WPS The WPS Configuration Screen of Wireless Adapter Method Two Enter the PIN into my AP Step 1 For the configuration of the wireless adapter please choose Enter the PIN of this device into my access point or wireless router in the configuration utility of the WPS as below and click Connect TP LINK a 3 Network w This application will guide you through configuring your wireless network Please choose a method to join a wireless network Push the button on my access point or wireless router Enter the PIN of my access point or wireless router enter the PIN of this device into my access point or wireless router PIN 16952898 16 Connect The WPS Configuration Screen of Wireless Adapter cf Note In this example the default PIN code of this adapter is
105. DNS Settings To set up for DDNS follow these instructions 1 Type the User Name for your DDNS account 2 Type the Password for your DDNS account 3 Type the Domain Name you received from dynamic DNS service provider 4 Click the Login button to log in the DDNS service Connection Status The status of the DDNS service connection is displayed here Click Logout to log out the DDNS service 5 Note If you want to login again with another account after a successful login please click the Logout button then input your new username and password and click the Login button 4 17 2 Comexe cn DDNS If the dynamic DNS Service Provider you select is www comexe cn the page will appear as shown in Figure 4 85 94 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS Service Provider Comexe www comexe cn Y Goto register Domain Name Domain Name Domain Name Domain Name Domain Name User Name username Password s s C Enable DDNS Connection Status DDNS not launching Save Figure 4 85 Comexe cn DDNS Settings To set up for DDNS follow these instructions 1 2 3 4 Type the Domain Name received from your dynamic DNS service provider Type the User Name for your DDNS account Type the Password for your DDNS account Click the Login button to log in to the DDNS service Connection Status The status of the DDNS service connection
106. Enter the amount of time in minutes and the user will be leased this dynamic IP Address After the time is up the user will be automatically assigned a new dynamic IP address The range of the time is 1 2880 minutes The default value is 120 minutes Default Gateway Optional It is suggested to input the IP address of the LAN port of the Router The default value is 192 168 0 254 Default Domain Optional Input the domain name of your network Primary DNS Optional Input the DNS IP address provided by your ISP or consult your ISP Or consult your ISP Secondary DNS Optional Input the IP address of another DNS server if your ISP provides two DNS servers ft Note To use the DHCP server function of the Router you must configure all computers on the LAN as Obtain an IP Address automatically 57 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT TEL 4 8 2 DHCP Client List Choose menu DHCP DHCP Client List and then you can view the information about the clients attached to the Router in the screen as shown in Figure 4 29 DHCP Client List ID Client Name MAC Address Assigned IP Lease Time 1 tplink14129 6C 62 6D F7 31 8D 192 168 0 100 01 15 47 2 Unknown 70 73 CB 1F C8 C9 192 168 0 101 01 56 32 Figure 4 29 DHCP Client List gt Client Name The name of the DHCP client gt MAC Address The MAC address of the DHCP client gt Assigned IP The IP address that the Router has allocated to the DHCP client
107. Figure 6 12 Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry To add or modify a MAC Address Filtering entry follow these instructions 1 Enter the appropriate MAC Address into the MAC Address field The format of the MAC Address is XX XX XX XX XX XX X is any hexadecimal digit For example 00 0A EB B0 00 0B 2 Give a simple description for the wireless station in the Description field For example Wireless station A 3 Select Enabled or Disabled for this entry on the Status pull down list 4 Click the Save button to save this entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Disable All button to make all entries disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page Click the Previous button to return to the previous page For example If you desire that the wireless station A with MAC address 00 0A EB B0 00 0B and the wireless station B with MAC address 00 0A EB 00 07 5F are able to access the Router but all the other wireless stations cannot access the Router you can configure the Wireless MAC Address Filtering list by following these steps 1 Click the Enable button to enable this function 147 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA A ETT TS 2 Select
108. Finish IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway D 0 0 0 Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Next Figure 3 25 Quick Setup Static IP 25 2 TL WR710N MIN tere ii gt PPPoE For this connection you will need your account name and password from your ISP If you have applied ADSL to realize Dial up service Please note that these fields are case sensitive Router AP TV Adapter Repeater you should choose this type Under this condition you should fill in both the User Name and Password that the ISP supplied Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt WAN Connection Type gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish User Name Password Confirm Password Quick Setup PPPoE Figure 3 26 Quick Setup PPPoE You can configure the basic settings for the wireless network on this page Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt WAN Connection Type gt gt Vvireless gt gt Finish Client Setting Quick Setup Wireless Example 00 1D 0F 11 22 33 Wireless Password 123456789 You c nt commonly known pharse Next SSID TP LINK_Network BSSID 94 0C 6D 2F 3C BE Key type is selected Keytype WPA PSK WPA2 PSK x WEP Index 1 Auth type open Password 1234567890 AP Setting Local SSID TP LINK_2046F2 Wireless Security Mode Most Secure
109. Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Backup 8 Restore Reboot Password and System Log Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below 6 9 1 Diagnostic Choose menu System Tools Diagnostic and then you can transact Ping or Traceroute function to check connectivity of your network in the following screen Diagnostic Tools Diagnostic Parameters Diagnostic Tool O Ping Traceroute IP Address Domain Name Ping Count 4 4 50 Ping Packet Size 64 4 1472 Bytes Ping Timeout 600 100 2000 milliseconds Traceroute Max TTL 20 1 30 Diagnostic Results This device is ready Figure 6 31 Diagnostic Tools gt Diagnostic Tool Check the radio button to select one diagnostic tool 160 TL WR710N MUI totes T A E ETA eda TLL e Ping This diagnostic tool troubleshoots connectivity reachability and name resolution to a given host or gateway e Traceroute This diagnostic tool tests the performance of a connection t Note You can use ping traceroute to test both numeric IP address or domain name If pinging tracerouting the IP address is successful but pinging tracerouting the domain name is not you might have a name resolution problem In this case ensure that the domain name you are specifying can be resolved by using Domain Name System DNS queries
110. Free Use Shared volume 1 96B 1 36B 626 MB 67 Eject Disk Rescan Figure 7 17 Storage Sharing gt Service Status Indicates the Network Sharing service s current status You can click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service and click the Stop button to stop it gt Volume The volume name of the USB drive the users have access to Volume 1 8 is mapping to USB port1 and Volume 9 16 is mapping to USB port2 gt Capacity The storage capacity of the USB driver gt Used The used space of the USB driver gt Free The available space of the USB driver gt Use The percentage of the used space gt Shared Indicates the shared or non shared status of the volume When the volume is shared you can click the Disable to stop sharing the volume when volume is non shared you can click the Enable button to share the volume Click the Start button to start the Network Sharing service Click the Stop button to stop the Network Sharing service Click the Eject Disk button to safely remove the USB storage device that is connected to USB port This takes the drive offline A message as shown in Figure 7 18 will appear on your web browser when it is safe to detach the USB disk 179 Message from webpage O This operation will disable Media Server Are you sure to continue Figure 7 18 Safe Unplug Message Click the Rescan button to start a new scan Follow the instructions below to set u
111. I LTS NI TIN AR AN ETT LTL 5 10 7 System Log Choose menu System Tools System Log and then you can view the logs of the Router System Log Auto Mail Feature Disabled Mail Settings Log Type ALL xj Log Level ALL v Index Time Type Level Log Content 171 1st day 02 57 44 DHCP INFO DHCPC DHCP Serice unavailable recv no OFFER 170 1st day 02 57 42 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag 1 169 1st day 02 57 40 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with requestip 0 and unicast flag 1 168 1st day 02 57 36 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag 0 167 1st day 02 57 34 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag 0 166 1st day 02 57 32 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag O Time 2013 01 01 3 07 43 11264s H Ver WR710N v2 00000000 S Ver 3 15 11 Build 131125 Rel 50653n L 192 168 0 254 M 255 255 255 0 W1 DHCP W 0 0 0 0 M 0 0 0 0 G 0 0 0 0 Mail Log CurrentNo 1 w Page Figure 5 41 System Log gt Refresh Refresh the page to show the latest log list gt Save Log Click to save all the logs in a txt file gt Mail Log Click to send an email of current logs manually according to the address and validation information set in Mail Settings The result will be shown in the later log soon gt Clear Log All the logs will be deleted from this device permanently not ju
112. I characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters between 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period 0 Seconds Keep it default if you are not sure minimum is 30 0 means no update WPA WPAZ2 Enterprise Version Automatic v Encryption Automatic v Radius Server IP Radius Port 1812 1 65535 0 stands for default port 1812 Radius Password Group Key Update Period 0 in second minimum is 30 O means no update O WEP Type Automatic y WEP Key Format Hexadecimal v Key Selected WEP Key Key Type Key 1 Disabled vw Key 2 Disabled v Key 3 Disabled Key 4 Disabled v Save Figure 5 12 Wireless Security Disable Security The wireless security function can be enabled or disabled If disabled the wireless stations will be able to connect the Router without encryption But it s strongly recommended to choose one of the following modes to enable security WPA PSK WPA2 Personal It s the WPA WPA2 authentication type based on pre shared passphrase e Version you can choose the version of the WPA PSK security on the drop down list The default setting is Automatic which can select WPA PSK Pre shared key of WPA or WPA2 PSK Pre shared key of WPA automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e Encryption When WPA PSK or WPA is set as the Authentication Type you can select either Automatic or TKIP or AES as Encryption amp Note If you check the WPA WPA2 Personal radio button and c
113. IP amp MAC Binding list gt Delete Delete the item Click the Bind All button to bind all the current items available after enable Click the Load All button to load all items to the IP amp MAC Binding list Click the Refresh button to refresh all items ce Note An item could not be loaded to the IP amp MAC Binding list if the IP address of the item has been loaded before Error warning will prompt as well Likewise Load All only loads the items without interference to the IP amp MAC Binding list 4 17 Dynamic DNS The Router offers the DDNS Dynamic Domain Name System feature which allows the hosting of a website FTP server or e mail server with a fixed domain name named by yourself and a 93 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS dynamic IP address and then your friends can connect to your server by entering your domain name no matter what your IP address is Before using this feature you need to sign up for DDNS service providers such as www no ip com www comexe cn or www dyndns org The Dynamic DNS client service provider will give you a password or key 4 17 1 No IP DDNS If the dynamic DNS Service Provider you select is www no ip com the page will appear as shown in Figure 4 84 Service Provider No IP www no ip com Goto register User Name username Password s m Domain Name C Enable DDNS Connection Status DDNS not launching Figure 4 84 No IP D
114. IP addresses 192 168 0 100 is the default start address gt End IP Address Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to end with when assigning IP addresses 192 168 0 199 is the default end address gt Address Lease Time The Address Lease Time is the amount of time a network user will be allowed connection to the Router with their current dynamic IP Address Enter the amount of time in minutes and the user will be leased this dynamic IP Address After the time is up the user will be automatically assigned a new dynamic IP address The range of the time is 1 2880 minutes The default value is 120 minutes gt Default Gateway Optional It is suggested to input the IP address of the LAN port of the Router The default value is 192 168 0 254 gt Default Domain Optional Input the domain name of your network gt Primary DNS Optional Input the DNS IP address provided by your ISP or consult your ISP gt Secondary DNS Optional Input the IP address of another DNS server if your ISP provides two DNS servers Note 1 To use the DHCP server function of the Router you must configure all computers on the LAN as Obtain an IP Address automatically 2 When you choose the Smart IP DHCP mode in Network LAN the DHCP Server function will be disabled You will see the page as below DHCP Settings DHCP Server Disable Enable Start IP Address 92 168 0 100 End IP Address 92 168 0 199 Address Lease Time
115. It may be illegal to use the wireless function of the Router in a region other than one of those specified in this field If your country or region is not listed please contact your local government agency for assistance gt Channel This field determines which operating frequency will be used The default channel is set to Auto lt is not necessary to change the wireless channel unless you notice interference problems with another nearby access point gt Mode Select the desired mode The default setting is 11bgn mixed e 11bg mixed Select if you are using both 802 11b and 802 11g wireless clients e 11bgn mixed Select if you are using a mix of 802 11b 11g and 11n wireless clients 114 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL When 11bg mixed mode is selected only 11bg mixed wireless stations can connect to the Router It is strongly recommended that you set the Mode to 11bgn mixed and all of 802 11b g n wireless stations can connect to the Router amp Note If 11bg mixed mode is selected in the Mode field the Channel Width selecting field will turn grey and the value will become 20M which is unable to be changed gt Channel Width Select any channel width from the pull down list The default setting is automatic which can automatically adjust the channel width for your clients gt Enable Wireless Radio The wireless radio of the Router can be enabled or disabled to allow wireless stations access If en
116. L Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet connection terminates Connect Automatically Connect automatically after the Router is disconnected To use this option check the radio button Connect Manually You can configure the Router to make it connect or disconnect manually After a specified period of inactivity Max Idle Time the Router will disconnect from your Internet connection and you will not be able to re establish your connection automatically as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again To use this option click the radio button If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number in minutes that you wish to have the Internet connecting last unless a new link is requested Caution Sometimes the connection cannot be disconnected although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background Click the Save button to save your settings 4 6 2 MAC Clone Choose menu Network MAC Clone and then you can configure the WAN MAC address on the screen below as shown in Figure 4 16 WAN MAC Address 00 1D 0F 01 06 29 Restore Factory MAC Your PC s MAC Address 6C 62 6D F7 31 8D Clone MAC Address Figure 4 16 MAC Address Clone Some ISPs require that you register the MAC Address of your ada
117. LTL e Key Type You can select the WEP key length 64 bit or 128 bit or 152 bit for encryption Disabled means this WEP key entry is invalid 64 bit You can enter 10 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 5 ASCII characters 128 bit You can enter 26 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 13 ASCII characters 152 bit You can enter 32 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 16 ASCII characters E Note If you do not set the key the wireless security function is still disabled even if you have selected Shared Key as Authentication Type Be sure to click the Save button to save your settings on this page 4 7 3 Wireless MAC Filtering Choose menu Wireless Wireless MAC Filtering and then you can control the wireless access by configuring the Wireless MAC Filtering function as shown in Figure 4 22 Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless MAC Filtering Enabled Filtering Rules Deny the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access O Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access 1D MAC Address Status Description Modify Add New Enable A Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 4 22 Wireless MAC Filtering To filter wireless users by MAC Address click Enable The default setting is Disable gt MAC Address The wireless st
118. List and System Routing Table Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 8 13 1 Static Routing List Choose menu Static Routing and you can configure the static route in the next screen shown in Figure 8 68 A static route is a pre determined path that network information must travel to reach a specific host or network Static Routing 1D Destination Network Subnet Mask Default Gateway Status Modify Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 8 68 Static Routing To add static routing entries follow the steps below 1 Click Add New shown in Figure 8 68 you will see the following screen Figure 8 69 Add or Modify a Static Route Entry Destination Network Subnet Mask Default Gateway Status Enabled v Figure 8 69 Add or Modify a Static Route Entry 2 Enter the following data gt Destination Network The Destination IP Address is the address of the network or host that you want to assign to a static route 246 3 4 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS gt Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask determines which portion of an IP Address is the network portion and which portion is the host portion gt Default Gateway This is the IP Address of the gateway device that allows for contact between the Router and the network or host Select Enabled or Disabled for this entry on the Statu
119. NAT traversal filters to be plugged into the gateway to support address and port translation for certain application layer control data protocols such as FTP TFTP H323 etc e FTP ALG To allow FTP clients and servers to transfer data across NAT keep the default Enable e TFTP ALG To allow TFTP clients and servers to transfer data across NAT keep the default Enable e H323 ALG To allow Microsoft NetMeeting clients to communicate across NAT keep the default Enable Click the Save button to save your settings 4 11 2 Advanced Security Choose menu Security Advanced Security you can protect the Router from being attacked by TCP SYN Flood UDP Flood and ICMP Flood in the screen as shown in Figure 4 50 72 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS Advanced Security Packets Statistics Interval 5 60 110 v Seconds DoS Protection Disable Enable Enable ICMP FLOOD Attack Filtering ICMP FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 s Packets Secs Enable UDP FLOOD Filtering UDP FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 500 Packets Secs Enable TCP SYN FLOOD Attack Filtering TCP SYN FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 50 Packets Secs Ignore Ping Packet from WAN Port to Router Forbid Ping Packet from LAN Portto Router Figure 4 50 Advanced Security gt Packets Statistics Interval 5 60 The default value is 10 Select a value between 5 and 60 seconds from the drop down list The Packets Statisti
120. NCC Notice amp BSMI Notice ESA ER EAS PE EE ARA ARE EA ilk PRA ROE ZR ER JEKE Zon A aA gt AN mi fl K MADERA R iar AE EH o EFU RORA ERENER AER PAST KARA TERNAR E BFH WAGER ETERN UN AS DA RUS AM LATA ALA PEA A EN PEZ Eo HO EMBUDO ZREN PA DORIA GA AE UE RA BRE SC FAS E mY DE ASE ti o OUNAE CA UR IA MR RAE TI A o ae OLER INEA AD aE BU AS mE o OR PORE DUE DR ASE m ERE MARA AREA ADO OAK A E BOLT RIEA ERRER PRU AN CEE 8 PA ORGAZ ATT DAR MEA UAT ABA aE in ii BORE BRS A EET EI HE y MpoAaykT ceptuqikoBaHo 3riaHo c npasnnamn cuctemu YKpCEMPO Ha BianoBiaHicre BUMOraM HOPpMaTuUBHUX GOKyYMeHTIB Ta BUMOraM WO nepeg6ayeni YAHHUMU 3aKOHOAABYUMU akTamu YkpaiHn HL Safety Information When product has power button the power button is one of the way to shut off the product when there is no power button the only way to completely shut off power is to disconnect the product or the power adapter from the power source e Don t disassembl
121. One Step 1 Keep the WPS Status as Enabled and click the Add Device button in Figure 5 3 then the following screen will appear Add A New Device Enter the new device s PIN PIN rress the button of the new device in two minutes Figure 5 4 Add A New Device Step 2 Choose Press the button of the new device in two minutes and click Connect Step 3 For the configuration of the wireless adapter please choose Push the button on my access point or wireless router in the configuration utility of the WPS as below and click Connect 108 TL WR710N MIN LTL TNA AN ETT TS TP LINK The Reliable Choice Z Status w This application will guide you through configuring your wireless network Please choose a method to join a wireless network 9 Push the button on my access point or wireless router Enter the PIN of my access point or wireless router Enter the PIN of this device into my access point or wireless router The WPS Configuration Screen of Wireless Adapter Step 4 Wait for a while until the next screen appears Click OK to complete the WPS configuration Configuring the wireless network Successfully connected to the network by WPS The WPS Configuration Screen of Wireless Adapter Method Two Enter the PIN into my AP Step 1 For the configuration of the wireless adapter please choose Enter the PIN of this device into my access point or wireless router
122. P server will be configured automatically while the Virtual Server and DMZ Host will not take effect until they are re configured 206 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA A ETT TLL 8 6 Wireless Wireless Wireless Security Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless Advanced Wireless Statistics Figure 8 14 Wireless menu There are five submenus under the Wireless menu shown in Figure 8 14 Wireless Settings Wireless Security Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless Advanced and Wireless Statistics Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 8 6 1 Wireless Settings Choose menu Wireless Wireless Settings and then you can configure the basic settings for the wireless network on this page Wireless Settings Client Setting SSID TP LINK_Network BSSID 94 0C 6D 2F 3C BE Example 00 1D OF 11 22 33 Key type WPA PSKAVPA2 PSK vw WEP Index 1 Auth type open Password 1234567890 AP Setting Local SSID TP LINK_2046F2 Enable Wireless Router Radio Enable SSID Broadcast O Disable Local Wireless Access Save Figure 8 15 Wireless Security gt SSID The SSID of the AP your Router is going to connect to as a client gt BSSID The BSSID of the AP your Router is going to connect to as a client gt Survey Click this button to search the APs 207 TL WR710N MUI LTS MITIN AR A e ETT TS Key type
123. PIN code of the AP can be found in its label or the WPS configuration screen as Figure 4 3 You will see the following screen when the new device has successfully connected to the network 35 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS Add A New Device O Enter the new device s PIN PIN Press the button of the new device in two minutes Connect successfully Figure 4 6 5 Note 1 2 The WPS LED on the AP will light green for five minutes if the device has been successfully added to the network The WPS function cannot be configured if the Wireless function of the AP is disabled Please make sure the Wireless function is enabled before configuring the WPS 4 5 Working Mode The Router supports five operation mode types Wireless Router Access Point Repeater Client and Wireless Client Router Please select one you want Click Save to save your choice which is shown as Figure 4 7 Working Mode Wireless Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection via ADSUCable Modem Access Point Transform your existing wired network to a wireless network Repeater Extend your existing wireless coverage by relaying wireless signal Client Acting as a Wireless Adapter to connect your wired devices e g Xbox PS3 to a wireless network WISP Client Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP Figure 4 7 Wireless Working Mode Settings
124. SL Cable Modem The only wired port works as WAN gt Access Point The wireless access point mode gt Repeater The wireless Repeater Mode It could extend the range of wireless network gt Client The Client Mode The computer connected by Ethernet could get access to an AP by Client mode 169 TL WR710N MUI LTS INTA AN ETT LTL gt WISP Client Router In this mode the device enables multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP 7 5 Network Figure 7 4 the Network menu There is only one submenu under the Network menu shown in Figure 7 4 LAN 7 5 1 LAN Choose menu Network LAN and then you can configure the IP parameters of the LAN on the screen as below LAN MAC Address 00 1D OF 01 06 28 Type Smart IP DHCP IP Address 192 168 0 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Y IGMP Proxy Enable Note IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol works for IPT multicast stream The device supports both IGMP proxy with enable or disable option and IGMP snooping Save Figure 7 5 LAN gt MAC Address The physical address of the LAN ports as seen from the LAN The value can t be changed gt Type Choosing Smart IP DHCP to get IP address from DHCP server or choosing static IP to config IP address manually gt IP Address Enter the IP address of your system in dotted decimal notation factory default 192 168 0 254 gt Subnet Mask An address cod
125. Sent Packets Packets sent by the station gt Configure The button is used for loading the item to the Wireless MAC Filtering list You cannot change any of the values on this page To update this page and to show the current connected wireless stations click on the Refresh button If the numbers of connected wireless stations go beyond one page click the Next button to go to the next page and click the Previous button to return the previous page EP Note This page will be refreshed automatically every 5 seconds 6 7 DHCP DHCP DHCP Client List Address Reservation Figure 6 15 The DHCP menu There are three submenus under the DHCP menu shown in Figure 6 15 DHCP Settings DHCP Client List and Address Reservation Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 6 7 1 DHCP Settings Choose menu DHCP DHCP Settings and then you can configure the DHCP Server on the page as shown in Figure 6 16 The Router is set up by default as a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server which provides the TCP IP configuration for all the PC s that are connected to the Router in the LAN 150 TL WR710N MUI kote TN A MCL TITS DHCP Server Disable Enable Start IP Address 192 168 0 100 End IP Address 192 168 0 199 Address Lease Time ho minutes 1 2880 minutes the default value is 120 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 option
126. Stations numbers 1 ID MAC Address Current Status Received Packets Sent Packets Configure 1 70 73 CB 1F C8 C9 STA ASSOC 46 16 Previous Next Figure 4 26 Wireless Statistics gt MAC Address The connected wireless station s MAC address 55 TL WR710N MUI LTS NIT AAN ETT LTL gt Current Status The connected wireless station s running status one of STA AUTH STA ASSOC STA JOINED WPA WPA PSK WPA2 WPA2 PSK AP UP AP DOWN Disconnected gt Received Packets Packets received by the station gt Sent Packets Packets sent by the station gt Configure The button is used for loading the item to the Wireless MAC Filtering list e Allow If the Wireless MAC Filtering function enable allow the station to access e Deny If the Wireless MAC Filtering function enable deny the station to access You cannot change any of the values on this page To update this page and to show the current connected wireless stations click on the Refresh button If the numbers of connected wireless stations go beyond one page click the Next button to go to the next page and click the Previous button to return the previous page EP Note This page will be refreshed automatically every 5 seconds 4 8 DHCP DHCP DHCP Client List Address Reservation Figure 4 27 The DHCP menu There are three submenus under the DHCP menu shown in Figure 4 27 DHCP Settings DHCP Clients List and Address Reservat
127. TL WR710N router with an Ethernet cable 2 Plug the power plug of TL WR710N in electrical wall socket 3 Power on the PC s 2 3 5 WISP Client Router Mode Use as a client router to receive Internet access from a Wireless Internet Service Provider WISP and share that access with local devices SSID abc E R o SSID def Figure 2 5 Hardware Installation of the TL WR710N in WISP Client Router Mode 1 Plug the power plug of TL WR710N in electrical wall socket 2 Power on the notebook s TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL Chapter 3 Quick Installation Guide This chapter will show you how to configure the basic functions of your TL WR710N WiFi Pocket Router AP TV Adapter Repeater using Quick Setup Wizard within minutes 3 1 TCP IP Configuration The default IP address of the TL WR710N WiFi Pocket Router AP TV Adapter Repeater is 192 168 0 254 And the default Subnet Mask is 255 255 255 0 These values can be changed as you desire In this guide we use all the default values for description Connect the local PC to the LAN port of the Router And then you can configure the IP address for your PC as the following steps 1 Set up the TCP IP Protocol in Obtain an IP address automatically mode on your PC If you need instructions as to how to do this please refer to Appendix B Configuring the PC 2 Then the built in DHCP server will assign IP address for the PC Then connect to the Router through wireless
128. TP LINK User Guide TL WR710N WiFi Pocket Router AP TV Adapter Repeater A Rev 2 0 0 1910010956 COPYRIGHT amp TRADEMARKS Specifications are subject to change without notice TP LINK is a registered trademark of TP LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD Other brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders No part of the specifications may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative such as translation transformation or adaptation without permission from TP LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD Copyright O 2014 TP LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD All rights reserved http www tp link com FCC STATEMENT HE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the followi
129. You can specify the user name and password for Storage Sharing users on this page Storage Sharing users can use Internet Explorer to access files on the USB drive There are two default user accounts that can access the Storage Sharing They are Administrator and Guest as shown in Figure 6 28 Administrator has read write access to Storage Sharing and can access FTP Server while Guest has read only access to Storage Sharing and cannot access FTP Server User Account Management Add New User User Name Password Storage Authority Modify admin admin Read and Write yes Edit guest guest Read Only no Edit Figure 6 28 User Account Management Only Administrator can use a Web browser to transfer the files from a PC to the Writable shared volume on the USB drive To add a new user account please follow the steps below 1 Click Add New User button and the screen will appear as shown in Figure 6 29 2 Self define a User Name 3 Enter the password in the Password field 158 TL WR710N MUI eT A MCL TT 4 Choose the Storage Authority from the drop down list Read and Write or Read Only Add or Modify User Account User Name admin2 Password admin Storage Authority Read and Write vw Save Back Figure 6 29 Add or Modify User Account gt User Name Type the user name that you want to give access to the USB drive The user name must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 cha
130. abled the wireless stations will be able to access the Router Otherwise wireless stations will not be able to access the Router gt Enable SSID Broadcast If you select the Enable SSID Broadcast checkbox the wireless router will broadcast its name SSID on the air Be sure to click the Save button to save your settings on this page c Note 1 The operating distance or range of your wireless connection varies significantly based on the physical placement of the Router For best results place your Router e Near the center of the area in which your wireless stations will operate e In an elevated location such as a high shelf e Away from the potential sources of interference such as PCs microwaves and cordless phones e Away from large metal surfaces 2 Failure to follow these guidelines can result in significant performance degradation or inability to wirelessly connect to the Router 5 7 2 Wireless Security Choose menu Wireless Wireless Security and then you can configure the security settings of your wireless network There are three wireless security modes supported by the Router WPA WPA2 Personal WPA WPA2 Enterprise and WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy 115 TL WR710N MUI tote T A AN ETA TITS Wireless Security O Disable Security WPAWPA2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Recommended Encryption Automatic Recommended Wireless Password You can enter ASCI
131. ackets received and transmitted in the last Packets Statistic interval seconds Bvtes The total amount of bytes received and transmitted in the last y Packets Statistic interval seconds C rrent ICMP Tx The total amount of the ICMP packets transmitted to WAN in the last Packets Statistic interval seconds UDP Tx The total amount of the UDP packets transmitted to WAN in the last Packets Statistic interval seconds The total amount of the TCP SYN packets transmitted to WAN in TCP SYN T vee i the last Packets Statistic interval seconds Click the Save button to save the Packets Statistic interval value Click the Auto refresh checkbox to refresh automatically Click the Refresh button to refresh immediately 104 TL WR710N MUI totes MI Cle Vem AY MCL TITS Chapter 5 Configuration for Access Point Mode This chapter will show each Web page s key functions and the configuration way for Access Point Mode of TL WR710N 5 1 Login After your successful login you can configure and manage the device There are main menus on the left of the web based utility Submenus will be available after you click one of the main menus On the right there are the corresponding explanations and instructions Status Quick Setup WPS Working Mode Network Wireless DHCP USB Settings System Tools Figure 5 1 The detailed explanations for each Web page s key function are listed below 5 2 Status The Status page provi
132. agnostic Results This device is ready Figure 8 85 Diagnostic Tools 257 TL WR710N PWT T A MCL TT gt Diagnostic Tool Check the radio button to select one diagnostic too e Ping This diagnostic tool troubleshoots connectivity reachability and name resolution to a given host or gateway e Traceroute This diagnostic tool tests the performance of a connection Note You can use ping traceroute to test both numeric IP address or domain name If pinging tracerouting the IP address is successful but pinging tracerouting the domain name is not you might have a name resolution problem In this case ensure that the domain name you are specifying can be resolved by using Domain Name System DNS queries gt IP Address Domain Name Type the destination IP address such as 202 108 22 5 or Domain name such as www baidu com gt Pings Count The number of Ping packets for a Ping connection gt Ping Packet Size The size of Ping packet gt Ping Timeout Set the waiting time for the reply of each Ping packet If there is no reply in the specified time the connection is overtime gt Traceroute Max TTL The max number of hops for a Traceroute connection Click Start to check the connectivity of the Internet The Diagnostic Results page displays the result of diagnosis If the result is similar to the following screen the connectivity of the Internet is fine Diagnostic Results
133. al Default Domain optional Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 optional SecondaryDNS 0 0 0 0 optional Figure 6 16 DHCP Settings DHCP Server Enable or Disable the DHCP server If you disable the Server you must have another DHCP server within your network or else you must configure the computer manually Start IP Address Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to start with when assigning IP addresses 192 168 0 100 is the default start address End IP Address Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to end with when assigning IP addresses 192 168 0 199 is the default end address Address Lease Time The Address Lease Time is the amount of time a network user will be allowed connection to the Router with their current dynamic IP Address Enter the amount of time in minutes and the user will be leased this dynamic IP Address After the time is up the user will be automatically assigned a new dynamic IP address The range of the time is 1 2880 minutes The default value is 120 minutes Default Gateway Optional It is suggested to input the IP address of the LAN port of the Router The default value is 192 168 0 254 Default Domain Optional Input the domain name of your network Primary DNS Optional Input the DNS IP address provided by your ISP or consult your ISP Secondary DNS Optional Input the IP address of another DNS server if your ISP provides two DNS servers Note To use the DHCP server
134. al digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 5 ASCII characters 128 bit You can enter 26 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 13 ASCII characters 174 TL WR710N MUI eT A MCL TT 152 bit You can enter 32 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 16 ASCII characters Cf Note If you do not set the key the wireless security function is still disabled even if you have selected Shared Key as Authentication Type 7 7 DHCP DHCP Client List Address Reservation Figure 7 10 The DHCP menu There are three submenus under the DHCP menu shown in Figure 7 10 DHCP Settings DHCP Client List and Address Reservation Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 7 7 1 DHCP Settings Choose menu DHCP DHCP Settings and then you can configure the DHCP Server on the page as shown in Figure 7 11 The Router is set up by default as a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server which provides the TCP IP configuration for all the PC s that are connected to the Router in the LAN DHCP Settings DHCP Server Disable Enable Start IP Address 192 168 0 100 End IP Address 192 168 0 199 Address Lease Time 120 minutes 1 2880 minutes the default value is 120 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 optional Default Do
135. al surfaces 2 Failure to follow these guidelines can result in significant performance degradation or inability to wirelessly connect to the Router 7 6 2 Wireless Security Choose menu Wireless Wireless Security and then you can configure the security settings of your wireless network There are three wireless security modes supported by the Router WPA WPA2 Personal WPA WPA2 Enterprise and WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy 172 TL WR710N MUI tote T A AN ETA TITS Wireless Security O Disable Security WPAWPA2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Recommended Encryption Automatic Recommended Wireless Password You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters between 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period 0 Seconds Keep it default if you are not sure minimum is 30 0 means no update WPA WPAZ2 Enterprise Version Automatic v Encryption Automatic v Radius Server IP Radius Port 1812 1 65535 0 stands for default port 1812 Radius Password Group Key Update Period 0 in second minimum is 30 O means no update O WEP Type Automatic y WEP Key Format Hexadecimal v Key Selected WEP Key Key Type Key 1 Disabled vw Key 2 Disabled v Key 3 Disabled Key 4 Disabled v Save Figure 7 8 Wireless Security Disable Security The wireless security function can be enabled or disabled If disabled the wireless stations will be able to connect the
136. amaged or missing please contact with your distributor The provided power plug may differ from the picture due to different regional power specifications Here we take the EU version as an example TL WR710N MUI LTS MITIN A AN ETA ILa TLL Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Overview of the Router Small enough to fit in the average pocket the TL WR710N WiFi Pocket Router AP TV Adapter Repeater is uniquely suited to provide robust wireless networking to travelers students or anyone else for work or play Incredible Speed gt TL WR710N supports the newest 802 11n standards and provides backward compatibility with older 802 11b g standards as well The up to 150Mbps wireless speed makes it ideal for handling multiple data streams at the same time which ensures your network stable and smooth Multiple Operation Modes 7 The TL WR710N WiFi Pocket Router AP TV Adapter Repeater supports five operation modes Wireless Router mode creates an instant private wireless network and share Internet to multiple Wi Fi devices which is suitable for most hotel and home network Access Point mode creates a wireless network for Wi Fi devices The wireless devices are exposed to the wired network Repeater mode extends your home wireless range by copying the same wireless name and password Client mode works as a wireless adapter for any Ethernet enabled devices such as Smart TV Game Console and PC WISP Client Router mode accesses the Internet wireles
137. ardware Version WR710N v2 00000000 Wired MAC Address 00 1D 0F 01 06 30 IP Address 192 168 0 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Wireless Working Mode Client Wireless Name of Root AP Channel 8 Mode 11bgn mixed Channel Width Automatic MAC Address 00 1D 0F 01 06 30 Traffic Statistics Received Sent Bytes 0 444 Packets 0 4 System Up Time 0 days 00 00 54 Figure 7 2 Status Firmware Version The version information of the Router s firmware Hardware Version The version information of the Router s hardware Wired This field displays the current settings or information for the LAN you can configure them in the Network gt LAN page e MAC address The physical address of the Router as seen from the LAN e IP address The LAN IP address of the Router e Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with LAN IP address Wireless This field displays basic information or status for wireless function you can configure them in the Wireless gt Wireless Settings page e Working Mode The current wireless working mode in use e Wireless Name of Root AP The SSID of Root AP e Channel The current wireless channel in use e Mode The current wireless mode which the Router works on 168 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA A ETT TLL e Channel Width The current wireless channel width in use e MAC Address The physical address of the Router as seen from the WLAN gt Traffic Statistics The Router s traffic
138. as shown in Figure 3 9 This type of connection uses a permanent fixed static IP address that your ISP assigned In this type you should fill in the IP address Subnet Mask Default Gateway and DNS IP address manually which are specified by your ISP Then click Next and proceed to Figure 3 12 Quick Setup Static IP Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt WAN Connection Type gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Figure 3 9 Quick Setup Static IP If you select L2TP Russian L2TP and PPTP Russian PPTP manually the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 3 10 and Figure 3 11 Quick Setup L2TP User Name Password DynamiciP Static IP Server IP Address Name Figure 3 10 Quick Setup L2TP Russian L2TP Quick Setup PPTP User Name Password DynamicIP O Static IP Server IP Address Name Figure 3 11 Quick Setup PPTP Russian PPTP gt User Name Password Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP 16 TL WR710N MUI tote T A MCL IL TLEL These fields are case sensitive If you have difficulty with this process please contact your ISP gt Dynamic IP Static IP Select Static IP if IP address subnet mask gateway and DNS
139. ation s MAC address that you want to access gt Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disable gt Description A simple description of the wireless station To Add a Wireless MAC Address filtering entry click the Add New button The Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry page will appear shown in Figure 4 23 52 Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry MAC Address Description Status Enabled w Figure 4 23 Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry To add or modify a MAC Address Filtering entry follow these instructions 1 Enter the appropriate MAC Address into the MAC Address field The format of the MAC Address is XX XX XX XX XX XX X is any hexadecimal digit For example 00 0A EB B0 00 0B 2 Give a simple description for the wireless station in the Description field For example Wireless station A 3 Select Enabled or Disabled for this entry on the Status pull down list 4 Click the Save button to save this entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Disable All button to make all entries disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page Click
140. atus Enabled he Common Service Port Select One v Figure 8 39 Add or Modify a Virtual Server Entry ce Note If your computer or server has more than one type of available service please select another service and enter the same IP Address for that computer or server To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable Disable All button to make all entries enabled disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page and click the Previous button to return the previous page E Note If you set the service port of the virtual server as 80 you must set the Web management port on Security Remote Management page to be any other value except 80 such as 8080 Otherwise there will be a conflict to disable the virtual server 8 9 2 Port Triggering Choose menu Forwarding Port Triggering and then you can view and add port triggering in the screen as shown in Figure 8 40 Some applications require multiple connections like Internet games video conferencing Internet calling and so on These applications cannot work with a pure NAT Router Port Triggering is used for some of these applications that can work with an NAT Router 226 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL
141. button to specify a folder as the search path of media server The screen will then appear as shown in Figure 6 27 Add New Folder Display Name video Partition C Share entire partition Folder Location imy share Select Folder O photo video Figure 6 27 Add New Folder gt Display Name You can enter a display name for the share folder gt Share entire partition Choose this option and then the folders contained in this partition will all be shared gt Folder Location Displays the location of this folder gt Select Check the radio button to select the folder to share gt Folder Displays folders that are in current path gt Upper Click this button to get into the upper folder gt Save Click this button to save your settings and the page will be redirected to the media server configuration page 157 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT LTL gt Back Click this button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page 4 Click the Scan All button to scan all the share folders immediately You can also select the Auto scan at same time select an auto scan interval time by drop down list In this case the media server will auto scan the share folders ce Note The max share folders number is 6 If you want share a new folder when the number has been reached to be 6 you can delete a share folder and then add a new one 6 8 3 User Accounts
142. can view and add virtual servers in the screen as shown in Figure 4 42 Virtual servers can be used for setting up public services on your LAN such as DNS Email and FTP A virtual server is defined as a service port and all requests from the Internet to this service port will be redirected to the computer specified by the server IP Any PC that was used for a virtual server must have a static or reserved IP Address because its IP Address may be changed when using the DHCP function 65 TL WR710N MUI tele T A A ETA TIT Virtual Servers ID Service Port Internal Port IP Address Protocol Status Modify Add New Enable Al Disable All Delete Al Previous Next Figure 4 42 Virtual Servers Service Port The numbers of External Ports You can type a service port or a range of service ports in XXX YYY format XXX is the start port number YYY is the end port number Internal Port The Internal Service Port number of the PC running the service application You can leave it blank if the Internal Port is the same as the Service Port or enter a specific port number when Service Port is a single one IP Address The IP Address of the PC providing the service application Protocol The protocol used for this application either TCP UDP or All all protocols supported by the Router Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To setup a virtual
143. chedule Settings Note The Schedule is based on the time ofthe Router Schedule Description Day Everyday Select Days Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Time all day 24 hours Start Time HHMI Stop Time HHM Save Back Figure 8 65 Advanced Schedule Settings For example If you desire to restrict the internet activities of host with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA to access www google com only from 18 00 to 20 00 on Saturday and Sunday you should first follow the settings below 1 4 5 Click Add New button shown in Figure 8 64 to enter the Advanced Schedule Settings page In Schedule Description field create a unique description for the schedule e g Schedule_1 In Day field check the Select Days radio button and then select Sat and Sun In Time field enter 1800 in Start Time field and 2000 in Stop Time field Click Save to complete the settings Then you will go back to the Schedule Settings page and see the following list Schedule Settings ID Schedule Description Day Time Modify 1 Schedule_1 Sat Sun 18 00 20 00 Edit Delete Add New Delete All Prevoius Next Current No 1 v Page Figure 8 66 Schedule Settings 245 TL WR710N MUI LTS T A ETA TITS 8 13 Advanced Routing Advanced Routing System Routing Table Figure 8 67 The Advanced Routing Menu There are two submenus under the Network menu shown in Figure 4 71 Static Routing
144. ck Setup Wireless gt Wireless Name of Root AP Enter the SSID that you want to access gt MAC Address of Root AP Enter the MAC address of AP that you want to access gt Survey Click this button you can survey the AP which runs in the environment gt Region Select your region from the pull down list This field specifies the region where the wireless function of the Router can be used It may be illegal to use the wireless function of the Router in a region other than one of those specified in this field If your country or region is not listed please contact your local government agency for assistance 23 TL WR710N MUI tole T A AN ETA CL TLL gt WDS Mode This field determines which WDS Mode will be used It is not necessary to change the WDS Mode unless you notice network communication problems with root AP If you select Auto then Router will choose the appropriate WDS Mode automatically gt Wireless Security Mode This option should be chosen according to the security configuration of the AP you want to access It is recommended that the security type is the same as your AP s security type gt Wireless Password If the AP your router is going to connect need password you need to fill the password in this blank Click Survey button on the Wireless page as shown in Figure 3 21 and then AP List page will appear as shown in Figure 3 22 Find the SSID of the Access Point you want to access and
145. ck button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page EP Note Please restart the service for the new settings to take effect If you cannot use the new user name and password to access the shares press Windows logo R to open the Run dialog box and type net use 192 168 0 254 delete yes and press Enter 192 168 0 254 is your router s LAN IP address If the LAN IP of the modem connected with your router is 192 168 1 x the default LAN IP of the router will automatically switch from 192 168 0 254 to 192 168 1 254 to avoid IP conflict in this case please try net use 192 168 1 254 delete yes 5 10 System Tools System Tools Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Backup amp Restore Reboot Password System Log Figure 5 33 The System Tools menu Choose menu System Tools and then you can see the submenus under the main menu Diagnostic Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Backup amp Restore Reboot Password and System Log Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below 131 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT TLEL 5 10 1 Diagnostic Choose menu System Tools Diagnostic and then you can transact Ping or Traceroute function to check connectivity of your network in the following screen Diagnostic Tools Diagnostic Parameters Diagnostic Tool
146. click the Previous button to return the previous page amp Note If you set the service port of the virtual server as 80 you must set the Web management port on Security Remote Management page to be any other value except 80 such as 8080 Otherwise there will be a conflict to disable the virtual server 4 10 2 Port Triggering Choose menu Forwarding Port Triggering and then you can view and add port triggering in the screen as shown in Figure 4 44 Some applications require multiple connections like Internet games video conferencing Internet calling and so on These applications cannot work with a pure NAT Router Port Triggering is used for some of these applications that can work with an NAT Router 67 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL Port Triggering ID Trigger Port Trigger Protocol Incoming Ports Incoming Protocol Status Modify Add New Enable A Disable Al Delete All Previous Next Figure 4 44 Port Triggering Once the Router is configured the operation is as follows 1 A local host makes an outgoing connection using a destination port number defined in the Trigger Port field The Router records this connection opens the incoming port or ports associated with this entry in the Port Triggering table and associates them with the local host When necessary the external host will be able to connect to the local host using one of the ports defined in the Incoming Ports field
147. client gt Lease Time The time of the DHCP client leased After the dynamic IP address has expired a new dynamic IP address will be automatically assigned to the user You cannot change any of the values on this page To update this page and to show the current attached devices click the Refresh button 6 7 3 Address Reservation Choose menu DHCP Address Reservation and then you can view and add a reserved address for clients via the next screen shown in Figure 6 19 When you specify a reserved IP address for a PC on the LAN that PC will always receive the same IP address each time when it accesses the DHCP server Reserved IP addresses should be assigned to the servers that require permanent IP settings 152 gt gt gt TL WR710N MUI tote T N A AN ETA IL TLL Address Reservation 1D MAC Address Reserved IP Address Status Modify 1 00 11 22 33 44 AA 192 168 0 169 Enabled Modify Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 6 19 Address Reservation MAC Address The MAC address of the PC for which you want to reserve an IP address Reserved IP Address The IP address reserved for the PC by the Router Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To Reserve an IP address 1 2 Click the Add New button Then Figure 6 19 will pop up Enter the MAC address in XX XX XX XX XX XX f
148. commended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP Connect on Demand In this mode the Internet connection can be terminated automatically after a specified inactivity period Max Idle Time and be re established when you attempt to access the Internet again If you want your Internet connection keeps active all the time please enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet access disconnects Connect Automatically The connection can be re established automatically when it was down Connect Manually You can click the Connect Disconnect button to connect disconnect immediately This mode also supports the Max Idle Time function as Connect on Demand mode The Internet connection can be disconnected automatically 42 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLEL after a specified inactivity period and re established when you attempt to access the Internet again Click the Connect button to connect immediately Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately Caution Sometimes the connection cannot be terminated although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background Click the Save button to save your settings If your ISP provides L2TP connection please select L2TP Russia L2TP option Then you should enter the following parameters Figure 4 14
149. connection following the steps below 1 Click the icon at the bottom of your desktop Click refresh button and then select the default SSID of the Router Click Connect NetworkProfile 0 B19DDE_ZLP tl 8877A7 atl 5CD71E al Infra_KeyTest ill f TP LINK_Networkl M Y Connect automatically TP LINK_1B0F28 M TPLINK_030407 TP LINK_5CD71E oul AutoTest i Open Network and Sharing Center TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR A ETT LTL 2 Enter the Security key Click OK Type the network security key Security key seeeecccee 3 If you can see Connected after the default SSID you ve successfully connected to the wireless network eveevsosveveeevevsvevousvevessevseessovevesevseusecsesueseueseussusseusesuesesuseeseousueseeseusesseuuevenoesevaeseereey A nd Wireless Network Connection 6 A TP LINK Networki Connected y NetworkProfile e B19DDE_ZLP d 8877A7 s 1B0F28 Infra_KeyTest TP LINK_1B0F28 TP LINK_B19DDE_ZLP T En ie a oe Sy TP LINK_8877A7 vr Open Network and Sharing Center 10 12 AM 3 29 2011 EN i O c Note 1 The default SSID and Password of your Router are on the label Both are case sensitive 2 The pre encryption function is enabled by default and the default Network key Security key is the Password on the label Now you can run the Ping command in the command prompt to verify the network connection between your PC and the Router The following
150. cs Interval value indicates the time section of the packets statistics The result of the statistics is used for analysis by SYN Flood UDP Flood and ICMP Flood DoS Protection Denial of Service protection Check the Enable or Disable button to enable or disable the DoS protection function Only when it is enabled will the flood filters be enabled c Note Dos Protection will take effect only when the Traffic Statistics in System Tool Traffic Statistics is enabled Enable ICMP FLOOD Attack Filtering Enable or Disable the ICMP FLOOD Attack Filtering ICMP FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 The default value is 50 Enter a value between 5 3600 When the current ICMP FLOOD Packets number is beyond the set value the Router will startup the blocking function immediately Enable UDP FLOOD Filtering Enable or Disable the UDP FLOOD Filtering UDP FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 The default value is 500 Enter a value between 5 3600 When the current UPD FLOOD Packets number is beyond the set value the Router will startup the blocking function immediately 73 TL WR710N MUI tele TINA AN ETT TLL gt Enable TCP SYN FLOOD Attack Filtering Enable or Disable the TCP SYN FLOOD Attack Filtering gt TCP SYN FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 The default value is 50 Enter a value between 5 3600 When the current TCP SYN FLOOD Packets numbers is beyond the set value the Router will startup the blocking functio
151. ction you can configure them in the Wireless gt Wireless Settings page Working Mode The current wireless working mode in use Wireless Radio Indicates whether the wireless radio feature of the AP is enabled or disabled Name SSID The SSID of the AP Channel The current wireless channel in use Mode The current wireless mode which the Router works on Channel Width The current wireless channel width in use MAC Address The physical address of the Router as seen from the WLAN Client Status The status of Client WAN This field displays the current settings or information for the WAN you can configure them in the Network gt WAN page MAC Address The physical address of the WAN port as seen from the Internet IP Address The current WAN Internet IP Address This field will be blank or 0 0 0 0 if the IP Address is assigned dynamically and there is no connection to the Internet Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with the WAN IP Address Default Gateway The Gateway currently used by the Router is shown here When you use Dynamic IP as the connection Internet type the Renew button will be displayed here Click the Renew Button to obtain new IP parameters dynamically from the ISP And if you have got an IP address Release button will be displayed here Click the Release button to release the IP address the Router has obtained from the ISP DNS Server The DNS Domain Name System server IP addr
152. d Enter the password in the Password field The password must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length For security purposes the password for each user account is not displayed gt Storage Authority Choose Read and Write or Read Only from the drop down list to assign access authority of Storage Sharing to the user gt Save You can click the Save button to save your settings gt Back You can click the Back button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page c Note Please restart the service for the new settings to take effect If you cannot use the new user name and password to access the shares press Windows logo R to open the Run dialog box and type net use 192 168 0 254 delete yes and press Enter 192 168 0 254 is your router s LAN IP address If the LAN IP of the modem connected with your router is 192 168 1 x the default LAN IP of the router will automatically switch from 192 168 0 254 to 192 168 1 254 to avoid IP conflict in this case please try net use 192 168 1 254 delete yes 184 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL 7 9 System Tools System Tools Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Backup amp Restore Reboot Password System Log Figure 7 25 The System Tools menu Choose menu System Tools and then you can see the submenus under the main menu Diagnostic Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Bac
153. d on the Status page 4 How to enable DMZ Host Log in to the Router click the Forwarding menu on the left of your browser and click DMZ submenu On the DMZ page click Enable radio button and type your IP address into the DMZ Host IP Address field using 192 168 0 169 as an example remember to click the Save button DMZ Current DMZ Status Enable O Disable DMZ Host IP Address 192 168 0 169 Figure A 6 DMZ 4 want to build a WEB Server on the LAN what should I do 1 Because the WEB Server port 80 will interfere with the WEB management port 80 on the Router you must change the WEB management port number to avoid interference 266 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLEL 2 To change the WEB management port number Log in to the Router click the Security menu on the left of your browser and click Remote Management submenu On the Remote Management page type a port number except 80 such as 88 into the Web Management Port field Click Save and reboot the Router Remote Management Web Management Port 88 Remote Management IP Address 0 0 0 0 Enter 255 255 255 256 for all Figure A 7 Remote Management Note If the above configuration takes effect configure to the Router by typing 192 168 0 188 the Router s LAN IP address Web Management Port in the address field of the Web browser 3 Log in to the Router click the Forwarding me
154. ddress field enter the IP address of the target 3 Select a common service from Common Service Port drop down list so that the Target Port will be automatically filled If the Common Service Port drop down list doesn t have the service you want specify the Target Port manually 4 In Protocol field select TCP UDP ICMP or ALL e If you select Domain Name the screen shown is Figure 4 66 1 In Target Description field create a unique description for the target e g Target_1 83 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLEL 2 In Domain Name field enter the domain name either the full name or the keywords for example Google in the blank Any domain name with keywords in it e g www google com will be blocked or allowed You can enter 4 domain names 3 Click the Save button Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table Click the Next button to go to the next page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Add or Modify an Access Target Entry Mode IP Address Y EA Target Description IP Address Target Port Protocol All v Common Service Port Please Select Y Figure 4 65 Add or Modify an Access Target Entry Add or Modify an Access Target Entry Mode Domain Name Target Description Domain Name Figure 4 66 Add or Modify an Access Target Entry For example If you de
155. default channel is set to Auto It is not necessary to change the wireless channel unless you notice interference problems with another nearby access point gt Mode Select the desired mode The default setting is 11bgn mixed e 11bg mixed Select if you are using both 802 11b and 802 11g wireless clients e 11bgn mixed Select if you are using a mix of 802 11b 11g and 11n wireless clients When 11bg mixed mode is selected only 11bg mixed wireless stations can connect to the Router It is strongly recommended that you set the Mode to 11bgn mixed and all of 802 11b g n wireless stations can connect to the Router f Note If 11bg mixed mode is selected in the Mode field the Channel Width selecting field will turn grey and the value will become 20M which is unable to be changed gt gt Channel Width Select any channel width from the pull down list The default setting is automatic which can automatically adjust the channel width for your clients Wireless Security Mode This option should be chosen according to the security configuration of the AP you want to access It is recommended that the security type is the same as your AP s security type Wireless Password Input the password of your broadcast SSID Click the Next button You will then see the Finish page If you don t make any change on the Wireless page you will see the Finish page as shown in Figure 3 16 Click the Finish button to finish the Quick Setup
156. des the current status information about the Router on Access Point Mode All information is read only 105 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL Firmware Version 3 15 11 Build 131125 Rel 50653n Hardware Version WR710N v2 00000000 Wired MAC Address 00 1D 0F 01 06 30 IP Address 192 168 0 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Wireless Working Mode Access Point Wireless Network Name TP LINK_010630 Channel Auto Current channel 5 Mode 11bon mixed Channel Width Automatic MAC Address 00 1D 0F 01 06 30 Traffic Statistics Received Sent Bytes 0 27 216 Packets 0 63 System Up Time 0days 00 01 54 Figure 5 2 Status Firmware Version The version information of the Router s firmware Hardware Version The version information of the Router s hardware Wired This field displays the current settings or information for the LAN you can configure them in the Network gt LAN page e MAC address The physical address of the Router as seen from the LAN e IP address The LAN IP address of the Router e Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with LAN IP address Wireless This field displays basic information or status for wireless function you can configure them in the Wireless gt Wireless Settings page e Working Mode The current wireless working mode in use e Wireless Network Name The SSID of the AP e Channel The current wireless channel in use e Mode The current wireless mode which the
157. desired mode The default setting is 11bgn mixed 142 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS e 11bg mixed Select if you are using both 802 11b and 802 11g wireless clients e 11bgn mixed Select if you are using a mix of 802 11b 11g and 11n wireless clients When 11bg mixed mode is selected only 11bg mixed wireless stations can connect to the Router It is strongly recommended that you set the Mode to 11bgn mixed and all of 802 11b g n wireless stations can connect to the Router E Note If 11bg mixed mode is selected in the Mode field the Channel Width selecting field will turn grey and the value will become 20M which is unable to be changed gt Channel Width Select any channel width from the pull down list The default setting is automatic which can automatically adjust the channel width for your clients gt WDS Mode This field determines which WDS Mode will be used It is not necessary to change the WDS Mode unless you notice network communication problems with root AP If you select Auto then Router will choose the appropriate WDS Mode automatically gt Enable Wireless Radio The wireless radio of the Router can be enabled or disabled to allow wireless stations access If enabled the wireless stations will be able to access the Router Otherwise wireless stations will not be able to access the Router gt Survey Click this button you can search the AP which runs in the environment Click Survey butt
158. destination IP address e g 202 108 22 5 or Domain name e g http www tp link com Pings Count The number of Ping packets for a Ping connection The default is 4 Ping Packet Size The size of Ping packet The default is 64 Ping Timeout Set the waiting time for the reply of each Ping packet If there is no reply in the specified time the connection is overtime The default is 800 Traceroute Max TTL The max number of hops for a Traceroute connection The default is 20 Click Start to check the connectivity of the Internet The Diagnostic Results page displays the result of diagnosis If the result is similar to the following screen the connectivity of the Internet is fine Diagnostic Results Pinging 202 108 22 5 with 64 bytes of data Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 1 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 2 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 3 Reply from 202 108 22 5 bytes 64 time 1 TTL 127 seq 4 Approximate round trip times in milliseconds 1 Minimum 1 Maximum 1 Average 1 Figure 7 27 Diagnostic Results Note Only one user can use this tool at one time Options Number of Pings Ping Size and Ping Timeout are used for Ping function Option Tracert Hops are used for Tracert function 186 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT LTL 7 9 2 Firmware Upgrade Choose menu System Tools Firmware U
159. dit or delete item 250 TL WR710N MUI LTS NI TINA AN ETT TLEL When you want to add or modify an IP MAC Binding entry you can click the Add New button or Modify button and then you will go to the next page This page is used for adding or modifying an IP 8 MAC Binding entry IP amp MAC Binding Settings Bind MAC Address IP Address Figure 8 77 IP amp MAC Binding Setting Add amp Modify To add IP amp MAC Binding entries 1 2 3 4 Click the Add New button Enter the MAC Address and IP Address Select the Bind checkbox Click the Save button to save it To modify or delete an existing entry 1 2 Find the desired entry in the table Click Modify or Delete as desired on the Modify column To find an existing entry 1 2 Click the Find button shown in Figure 8 76 Enter the MAC Address or IP Address Enter the Find button in the next page shown in Figure 8 78 Find IP amp MAC Binding Entry MAC Address IP Address ID MAC Address IP Address Bind Link 1 00 04 EB 00 07 BE 192 168 0 173 To page Figure 8 78 Find IP amp MAC Binding Entry 251 TL WR710N MUI kote T A MCL TITS Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries 8 15 2 ARP List To manage the computer you could observe the computers in the LAN by checking th
160. e Here displays the schedule selected in the corresponding rule Action Here displays the action the Router takes to deal with the packets It could be Allow or Deny Allow means that the Router permits the packets to go through the Router Deny means that the Router rejects the packets to go through the Router Status This field displays the status of the rule Enabled means the rule will take effect Disabled means the rule will not take effect Modify Here you can edit or delete an existing rule To add a new rule please follow the steps below 1 2 3 4 Click the Add New button and the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 4 58 Give a name e g Rule_1 for the rule in the Rule Name field Select a host from the Host drop down list or choose Click Here To Add New Host List Select a target from the Target drop sown list or choose Click Here To Add New Target List Select a schedule from the Schedule drop down list or choose Click Here To Add New Schedule 79 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR A ETT TLL In the Action field select Deny or Allow In the Status field select Enabled or Disabled to enable or disable your entry Click the Save button Click the Enable All button to enable all the rules in the list Click the Disable All button to disable all the rules in the list Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table You can change the entry s order as desired
161. e It s based on Radius Server e Version you can choose the version of the WPA security from the pull down list The default setting is Automatic which can select WPA Wi Fi Protected Access or WPA2 WPA version 2 automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e Encryption You can select Automatic TKIP or AES e Radius Server IP Enter the IP address of the Radius server Radius Port Enter the port that Radius server used e Radius Password Enter the password for the Radius server e Group Key Update Period Specify the group key update interval in seconds The value should be 30 or above Enter 0 to disable the update WEP It is based on the IEEE 802 11 standard e Type you can choose the type for the WEP security on the pull down list The default setting is Automatic which can select Shared Key or Open System authentication type automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e WEP Key Format Hexadecimal and ASCII formats are provided here Hexadecimal format stands for any combination of hexadecimal digits 0 9 a f A F in the specified length ASCII format stands for any combination of keyboard characters in the specified length WEP Key Password Select which of the four keys will be used and enter the matching WEP key that you create Make sure these values are identical on all wireless stations in your network 51 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT
162. e relationship of MAC address and IP address on the ARP list and you could configure the items on the ARP list also This page displays the ARP List it shows all the existing IP amp MAC Binding entries ARP List ID MAC Address IP Address Status Configure 1 6C 62 6D F7 31 8D 192 168 0 100 Unbound Load Delete 2 00 0A EB 00 07 BE 192 168 0 173 Bound Load Delete Bind All Load All Refresh Figure 8 79 ARP List gt MAC Address The MAC address of the controlled computer in the LAN gt IP Address The assigned IP address of the controlled computer in the LAN gt Status Enabled or Disabled of the MAC address and IP address binding gt Configure Load or delete item gt Load Load the item to the IP amp MAC Binding list gt Delete Delete the item 1 Click the Bind All button to bind all the current items available after enable Click the Load All button to load all items to the IP amp MAC Binding list Click the Refresh button to refresh all items cf Note An item could not be loaded to the IP amp MAC Binding list if the IP address of the item has been loaded before Error warning will prompt as well Likewise Load All only loads the items without interference to the IP amp MAC Binding list 8 16 Dynamic DNS The Router offers the DDNS Dynamic Domain Name System feature which allows the hosting of a website FTP server or e mail server with a fixed domain name named by yourself
163. e Router s firewall e SPI Firewall SPI Stateful Packet Inspection also known as dynamic packet filtering helps to prevent cyber attacks by tracking more state per session lt validates that the 71 TL WR710N MUI LTS MITIN A AN ETT TS traffic passing through the session conforms to the protocol SPI Firewall is enabled by factory default If you want all the computers on the LAN exposed to the outside world you can disable it gt VPN VPN Passthrough must be enabled if you want to allow VPN tunnels using IPSec PPTP or L2TP protocols to pass through the Router s firewall e PPTP Passthrough Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP allows the Point to Point Protocol PPP to be tunneled through an IP network To allow PPTP tunnels to pass through the Router keep the default Enable e L2TP Passthrough Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol L2TP is the method used to enable Point to Point sessions via the Internet on the Layer 2 level To allow L2TP tunnels to pass through the Router keep the default Enable e IPSec Passthrough Internet Protocol Security IPSec is a suite of protocols for ensuring private secure communications over Internet Protocol IP networks through the use of cryptographic security services To allow IPSec tunnels to pass through the Router keep the default Enable gt ALG It is recommended to enable Application Layer Gateway ALG because ALG allows customized Network Address Translation
164. e effect until they are re configured 141 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR A ETT TLEL 6 6 Wireless Wireless Wireless Security Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless Advanced Wireless Statistics Figure 6 6 Wireless menu There are five submenus under the Wireless menu shown in Figure 6 6 Wireless Settings Wireless Security MAC Filtering Wireless Advanced and Wireless Statistics Click it and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 6 6 1 Wireless Settings Choose menu Wireless Wireless Settings and then you can configure the basic settings for the wireless network on this page Wireless Settings Wireless Name of Root AP MAC Address of Root AP Region United Kingdom v Mode 11bgn mixed Y Channel Width Auto v WDS Mode Auto v Enable Wireless Radio Figure 6 7 Wireless Settings Repeater gt Wireless Name of Root AP The SSID of AP that you want to access gt MAC Address of Root AP The MAC address of AP that you want to access gt Region Select your region from the pull down list This field specifies the region where the wireless function of the Router can be used It may be illegal to use the wireless function of the Router in a region other than one of those specified in this field If your country or region is not listed please contact your local government agency for assistance gt Mode Select the
165. e port gt Remote Management IP Address This is the current address you will use when accessing your router from the Internet The default IP Address is 0 0 0 0 It means this function is disabled To enable this function change the default IP Address to another IP Address as desired To access the router you will type your router s WAN IP Address into your browser s Address in IE or Location in Navigator box followed by a colon and the custom port number For example if your Router s WAN address is 202 96 12 8 and you use port number 8080 enter in your browser http 202 96 12 8 8080 You will be asked for the router s password After successfully entering the password you will be able to access the router s Web based utility amp Note Be sure to change the router s default password to a very secure password 75 TL WR710N MUI LTS NI TINA AN ETT TLL 4 12 Parental Control Choose menu Parental Control and you can configure the parental control in the screen as shown in Figure 4 53 The Parental Control function can be used to control the internet activities of the child limit the child to access certain websites and restrict the time of surfing Parental Control Settings Non Parental PCs not listed will not be able to access the Internet Parental Control Disable Enable MAC Address of Parental PC MAC Address of Your PC l6 c 62 60 f7 31 8d Copy To Above ID MAC address Web
166. e that determines the size of the network Normally 255 255 255 0 is used as the subnet mask gt IGMP Proxy The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP feature allows your devices in LAN can watch TV E Note 1 If you change the IP Address of LAN you must use the new IP Address to login to the Router 2 If the new LAN IP Address you set is not in the same subnet with the previous one the IP Address pool in the DHCP server will be configured automatically while the Virtual Server and DMZ Host will not take effect until they are re configured 170 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL 3 When you choose the Smart IP DHCP mode the DHCP Server function will be disabled 7 6 Wireless Wireless Security Figure 7 6 Wireless menu There are two submenus under the Wireless menu shown in Figure 7 6 Wireless Settings and Wireless Security Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 7 6 1 Wireless Settings Choose menu Wireless Wireless Settings and then you can configure the basic settings for the wireless network on this page Wireless Settings Wireless Name of Root AP MAC Address of Root AP Region United Kingdom x WDS Mode Auto v Enable Wireless Radio Figure 7 7 Wireless Settings Client gt Wireless Name of Root AP Enter the SSID of AP that you want to access gt MAC Address of Root AP Ent
167. e the product or make repairs yourself You run the risk of electric shock and voiding the limited warranty If you need service please contact us Avoid water and wet locations This product can be used in the following countries B LI N K TP LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY For the following equipment Product Description WiFi Pocket Router AP TV Adapter Repeater Model No TL WR710N Trademark TP LINK We declare under our own responsibility that the above products satisfy all the technical regulations applicable to the product within the scope of Council Directives Directives 1999 5 EC Directives 2004 108 EC Directives 2006 95 EC Directives 1999 519 EC Directives 2011 65 EU The above product is in conformity with the following standards or other normative documents ETSI EN 300 328 V1 7 1 2006 ETSI EN 301 489 1 V1 9 2 2011 amp ETSI EN 301 489 17 V2 2 1 2012 EN 55022 2010 EN 55024 2010 EN 61000 3 2 2006 A1 2009 A2 2009 EN 61000 3 3 2008 EN 60950 1 2006 A11 2009 A1 2010 A12 2011 EN 62311 2008 The product carries the CE Mark CE 1588 Person responsible for making this declaration Yang Hongliang Product Manager of International Business Date of issue 2014 TP LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO LTD Building 24 floors 1 3 4 5 and 28 floors 1 4 Central Science and Technology Park Shennan Rd Nanshan Shenzhen China Package Contents Chapter 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4
168. e which the Interior PC access the outside PC If all are blank or 0 the domain is no effective gt Protocol Transport layer protocol here there are All TCP UDP 249 TL WR710N MUI tote T A MCL TT gt Egress Bandwidth The max and the min upload speed which through the WAN port default number is 0 gt Ingress Bandwidth The max and the min download speed through the WAN port default number is 0 Step 3 Click the Save button 8 15 IP amp MAC Binding IP amp MAC Binding ARP List Figure 8 75 The IP amp MAC Binding menu There are two submenus under the IP amp MAC Binding menu Binding Setting and ARP List Click any of them and you will be able to scan or configure the corresponding function The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below 8 15 1 Binding Setting This page displays the IP amp MAC Binding Setting table you can operate it in accord with your desire Binding Settings ARP Binding Disable Enable ID MAC Address IP Address Bind Modify 1 00 0A EB 00 07 BE 192 168 0 173 Modify Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Current No 1 Page Figure 8 76 IP amp MAC Binding Setting gt MAC Address The MAC address of the controlled computer in the LAN gt IP Address The assigned IP address of the controlled computer in the LAN gt Bind Whether or not enable the ARP binding gt Modify E
169. ect option Otherwise you need to specify the connection type manually S Dynamic IP Most Common Cases For Cable DSUBroadband connection which makes your computer immediately online without any setting or signing in Static IP PPPoE Note For users in some areas such as Russia Ukraine etc please contact your ISP to choose connection type manually Figure 3 24 Quick Setup WAN Connection Type The Router supports three popular ways Dynamic IP Static IP and PPPoE to connect to the Internet To make sure the connection type your ISP provides please refer to the ISP Make sure the ca gt ble is securely plugged into the WAN port before detection Dynamic IP Your ISP uses a DHCP service to assign your Router an IP address for connecting to the Internet When the Router connects to a DHCP server or the ISP supplies you with DHCP connection please choose this type If you choose this type of connection no configuration should be set and you can go on with the wireless configuration in Figure 3 27 Static IP This type of connection uses a permanent fixed static IP address that your ISP assigned In this type you should fill in the IP address Subnet Mask Default Gateway and DNS IP address manually which are specified by your ISP Then click Next and proceed to Figure 3 27 Quick Setup Static IP Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt WAN Connection Type gt gt Wireless gt gt
170. ection from WISP You can configure your device quickly by the following steps in different modes 3 2 1 Wireless Router Mode When you choose Wireless Router on Working Mode page in Figure 3 5 take the following steps 13 TL WR710N SAna eT A MCL ILa LTL 1 Click Next in Figure 3 5 and then WAN Connection Type page will appear as shown in Figure 3 6 Quick Setup WAN Connection Type Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt WAN Connection Type gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish The Quick Setup is preparing to set up your connection type of WAN port The Router will try to detect the Internet connection type your ISP provides if you select the Auto Detect option Otherwise you need to specify the connection type manually Auto Detect Let the router automatically detect the internet connection type provided by your ISP Dynamic IP Most Common Cases Static IP PPPoE L2TP Russian L2TP PPTP Russian PPTP Note For users in some areas such as Russia Ukraine etc please contact your ISP to choose connection type manually Figure 3 6 Quick Setup WAN Connection Type The Router provides Auto Detect function and supports five popular ways Dynamic IP Static IP PPPoE Russia PPPoE L2TP Russia L2TP and PPTP Russia PPTP to connect to the Internet It s recommended that you make use of the Auto Detect function If you are sure of what kind of connection type your ISP provides you can select the v
171. ecurity The wireless security function can be enabled or disabled If disabled the wireless stations will be able to connect the Router without encryption But it s strongly recommended to choose one of the following modes to enable security gt WPA PSK WPA2 Personal It s the WPA WPA2 authentication type based on pre shared passphrase e Version you can choose the version of the WPA PSK security on the drop down list The default setting is Automatic which can select WPA PSK Pre shared key of WPA or WPA2 PSK Pre shared key of WPA automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request 50 TL WR710N MUI LTS NI TINA AN ETT TS e Encryption When WPA PSK or WPA is set as the Authentication Type you can select either Automatic or TKIP or AES as Encryption amp Note If you check the WPA PSK WPA2 PSK radio button and choose TKIP encryption you will find a notice in red as shown in Figure 4 21 WPA WPA2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Recommended Encryption TKIP Wireless Password You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters between 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period 0 Seconds Keep it default if you are not sure minimum is 30 0 means no update We do not recommend using the TKIP encryption if this device operates in 802 11n mode due to the fact that TKIP is not supported by 802 11n specification Figure 4 21 WPA WPA2 Enterpris
172. ed You can enter 4 domain names 3 Click the Save button Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table Click the Next button to go to the next page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Add or Modify an Access Target Entry Mode IP Address Y EA Target Description IP Address Target Port Protocol All v Common Service Port Please Select Y Figure 8 61 Add or Modify an Access Target Entry Add or Modify an Access Target Entry Mode Domain Name Target Description Domain Name Figure 8 62 Add or Modify an Access Target Entry For example If you desire to restrict the internet activities of host with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA in the LAN to access www google com only you should first follow the settings below 1 Click Add New button in Figure 8 60 to enter the Add or Modify an Access Target Entry page In Mode field select Domain Name from the drop down list In Target Description field create a unique description for the target e g Target_1 In Domain Name field enter www google com a FF oN Click Save to complete the settings 243 TL WR710N MUI tote Clam T A MCL ol eda retells Then you will go back to the Target Settings page and see the following list ID Target Description Information Modify 1 Target_1 www google com Edit Delete
173. eea e teeter i A o R ARTAR 175 C2 DHCP Client List a rra aeanaeaacees 177 LS Address RESEMValtlon a cda 177 7 8 7 9 Chapter 8 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 USB CUINA ads 178 1 0 1 Storage Shades E E cteetitigeiaeti cht E 179 EB Meda OIE cito td nd dee eae 181 8 3 USEFACCOUNIS iscnsiaite sien arene tinct heeds tee eee inte ee 183 System Tod Sacco Id dd dd a deena ead 185 OT Diagnostic nicol ni lada nt 185 9 2 Firmware Upgrade cli bacan as 187 129 3 Factory Defaults ccoo eine ele elie heii 188 7 94 Backup amp Restore aae a a eaa aaaea E a aa eedan aeaa A aaa ae 188 LIDO REDOOt A A es 189 AS A NO 190 TIT SYSTEM LOG ss i cscieti ctecckfeusceuksageeetes E E ENE 191 Configuration for WISP Client Router Mode cccssseeccssseeesseeeneeeeseeeeeenseeeeneneeseenes 192 LOGIN noe se E esheets ened hai dada aia 192 MAS ea 192 AA AoA eA aA e lke Alan Ae ake ak 195 Working Mode ii teat hel ee eee 195 NetWoOT Kinito died doo Lede ees eed ee eee 196 B54 WANE Ants tando 196 802 MACCliNest a 205 Su AN E N e A a a 206 WITGIESS E EEA A EE bin E A E EE E A EE E da ER 207 8 61 Wireless Settings iii inn i 207 8 6 2 Wireless Security icici id dd dd dad 209 8 6 3 Wireless MAG FINGring 3 wcities treccteieoceheatdeceneneeieedietaecettanseteanbeoisttietaeceetieolebesbieen 211 8 6 4 Wireless Advanced icon 213 263 Wireless StatistiGs ici 214 DAG Positvi AA Aelia ie ee 215 8 7 1 DIHCP S
174. effect only after rebooting which include gt Change the LAN IP Address system will reboot automatically gt Change the DHCP Settings gt Change the Wireless configurations 135 TL WR710N MUI LTS NIT AR AN ETT TLL gt Change the Web Management Port gt Upgrade the firmware of the Router system will reboot automatically gt Restore the Router s settings to factory defaults system will reboot automatically gt Update the configuration with the file system will reboot automatically 5 10 6 Password Choose menu System Tools Password and then you can change the factory default user name and password of the Router in the next screen as shown in Figure 5 40 The username and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and must not include any spaces Old User Name Old Password New User Name New Password Confirm New Password Figure 5 40 Password It is strongly recommended that you should change the factory default user name and password of the Router because all users who try to access the Router s Web based utility or Quick Setup will be prompted for the Router s default user name and password E Note The new user name and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and not include any spaces Enter the new Password twice to confirm Click the Save button when finished Click the Clear All button to clear all 136 TL WR710N MU
175. elete an existing schedule To add a new schedule follow the steps below 1 Click Add New button shown in Figure 4 68 and the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 4 69 2 In Schedule Description field create a unique description for the schedule e g Schedule_1 wo In Day field select the day or days you need 4 In Time field you can select all day 24 hours or you may enter the Start Time and Stop Time in the corresponding field 5 Click Save to complete the settings Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table 85 TL WR710N MUI LTS NI TINA AN ETT LTL Click the Next button to go to the next page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Advance Schedule Settings Note The Schedule is based on the time ofthe Router Schedule Description Day Everyday Select Days Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Time all day 24 hours Start Time HHMI Stop Time HHM Save Back Figure 4 69 Advanced Schedule Settings For example If you desire to restrict the internet activities of host with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA to access www google com only from 18 00 to 20 00 on Saturday and Sunday you should first follow the settings below 1 4 5 Click Add New button shown in Figure 4 68 to enter the Advanced Schedule Settings page In Schedule Description field create a unique description for the schedule e g Sc
176. ement Add New User User Name Password Storage Authority Modify admin admin Read and Write yes Edit guest guest Read Only no Edit Figure 5 31 User Account Management Only Administrator can use a Web browser to transfer the files from a PC to the Writable shared volume on the USB drive To add a new user account please follow the steps below 1 Click Add New User button and the screen will appear as shown in Figure 5 32 2 Self define a User Name 3 Enter the password in the Password field 4 Choose the Storage Authority from the drop down list Read and Write or Read Only Add or Modify User Account User Name admin2 3 Password admin Storage Authority Read and Write v Figure 5 32 Add or Modify User Account 130 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL gt User Name Type the user name that you want to give access to the USB drive The user name must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length gt Password Enter the password in the Password field The password must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length For security purposes the password for each user account is not displayed gt Storage Authority Choose Read and Write or Read Only from the drop down list to assign access authority of Storage Sharing to the user gt Save You can click the Save button to save your settings gt Back You can click the Ba
177. ements Plug the power plug in the electrical wall socket The Router will start to work automatically After finishing the steps above please choose the operation mode you need and carry out the corresponding steps There are five operation modes supported by this router Wireless Router Access Point Repeater Client and WISP Client Router TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT TLL 2 3 1 Wireless Router Mode Create an instant private wireless network and share Internet to multiple Wi Fi devices This mode is suitable for hotel rooms and home networks Note if the hotel s Internet has an authentication process you will need to authenticate only once and only on one device 3 4 OO l o i e Wired Ethernet Connection Protected by NAT Firewall Figure 2 1 Hardware Installation of the TL WR710N in Router Mode Connect the LAN WAN port of TL WR710N to the LAN Port on the DSL Cable Modem Connect the WAN port on the DSL Cable Modem to the wired Internet Plug the power plug of TL WR710N in electrical wall socket Power on the DSL Cable Modem PC s and notebook s 2 3 2 Access Point Mode Create a wireless network from an Ethernet connection This mode is suitable for dorm rooms or homes where there s already a wired router but you need a wireless hotspot Note if the hotel s Internet has an authentication process you will need to authenticate it on EACH device Wired Ether
178. er the MAC address of AP that you want to access gt Region Select your region from the pull down list This field specifies the region where the wireless function of the Router can be used It may be illegal to use the wireless function of the Router in a region other than one of those specified in this field If your country or region is not listed please contact your local government agency for assistance gt WDS Mode This field determines which WDS Mode will be used It is not necessary to change the WDS Mode unless you notice network communication problems with root AP If you select Auto then Router will choose the appropriate WDS Mode automatically 171 TL WR710N MUI tole T A AN ETA L LTL gt Enable Wireless Radio The wireless radio of the AP can be enabled or disabled to allow or deny wireless stations to access If enabled the wireless stations will be able to access the AP otherwise wireless stations will not be able to access the AP gt Survey Click this button you can search the APs EP Note 1 The operating distance or range of your wireless connection varies significantly based on the physical placement of the Router For best results place your Router e Near the center of the area in which your wireless stations will operate e In an elevated location such as a high shelf e Away from the potential sources of interference such as PCs microwaves and cordless phones e Away from large met
179. erved IP Address Status Modify 1 00 11 22 33 44 AA 192 168 0 169 Enabled Modify Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 8 26 Address Reservation gt MAC Address The MAC address of the PC for which you want to reserve an IP address gt Reserved IP Address The IP address reserved for the PC by the Router gt Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled 217 gt TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To Reserve an IP address 1 2 Click the Add New button Then will pop up Enter the MAC address in XX XX XX XX XX XX format and IP address in dotted decimal notation of the computer for which you want to reserve an IP address Click the Save button Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry MAC Address Reserved IP Address Status Enabled Figure 8 27 Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete Modify the information Click the Save button Click the Enable Disable All button to make all entries enabled disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page and Click the Previous button to return the previous page 8 8 USB Settings USB Settings Media Ser
180. ery type and click Next to go on configuring EP Note Auto Detect function is not suitable for Static IP L2TP Russia L2TP and PPTP Russia PPTP you need to specify the connection type manually 2 If you select Auto Detect the Router will automatically detect the connection type your ISP provides Make sure the cable is securely plugged into the WAN port before detection The appropriate configuration page will be displayed when an active Internet service is successfully detected by the Router 1 If the connection type detected is Dynamic IP the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 3 7 gt In most cases you don t need to clone the MAC address if you have rebooted the modem with the new router please select No do NOT need to clone MAC address gt f you can t get the Internet connection after Quick Setup please run it again and select YES need to clone MAC address Then click Next and Figure 3 12 will appear 14 2 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLEL Quick Setup MAC Clone Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt WAN Connection Type gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish MAC Media Access Control address is a unique identifier that identifies your computer or device in the network Some ofthe ISPs may register the MAC address of your computer which firstly connects to their services and would not allow the Internet connection for any new computer or router TP LINK router can help you to clone or re
181. es such as Internet computers to access the local host resources or devices as needed UPnP devices can be automatically discovered by the UPnP service application on the LAN UPnP Current UPnP Status Enabled Current UPnP Settings List ID App Description External Port Protocol Internal Port IP Address Status Figure 8 43 UPnP gt Current UPnP Status UPnP can be enabled or disabled by clicking the Enable or Disable button gt Current UPnP Settings List This table displays the current UPnP information e App Description The description provided by the application in the UPnP request e External Port The external port the Router opens for the application e Protocol The type of protocol the Router opens for the application e Internal Port The Internal port the Router opens for local host e IP Address The IP address of the UPnP device that is currently accessing the Router 229 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL e Status The status of the port is displayed here Enabled means that the port is still active Otherwise the port is inactive Click Refresh to update the Current UPnP Settings List 8 10Security Security Advanced Security Local Management Remote Management Figure 8 44 The Security menu There are four submenus under the Security menu as shown in Figure 8 44 Basic Security Advanced Security Local Management and Remote Management Click any of them and you
182. ess station in the Description field For example Wireless station A 3 Select Enabled or Disabled for this entry on the Status pull down list 4 Click the Save button to save this entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Disable All button to make all entries disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page Click the Previous button to return to the previous page For example If you desire that the wireless station A with MAC address 00 0A EB B0 00 0B and the wireless station B with MAC address 00 0A EB 00 07 5F are able to access the Router but all the other wireless stations cannot access the Router you can configure the Wireless MAC Address Filtering list by following these steps 1 Click the Enable button to enable this function 2 Select the radio button Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the list to access for Filtering Rules 3 Delete all or disable all entries if there are any entries already 4 Click the Add New button e Enter the MAC address 00 0A EB B0 00 0B 00 0A EB 00 07 5F in the MAC Address field e Enter wireless station A B in the Description field e Select Enabled in the Status pull do
183. esses currently used by the Router Online Time The time that you online When you use PPPoE as WAN connection type the online time is displayed here Click the Connect or Disconnect button to connect to or disconnect from Internet Secondary Connection Besides PPPoE if you use an extra connection type to connect to a local area network provided by ISP then parameters of this secondary connection will be shown in this area IP Address The current WAN Internet IP Address This field will be blank or 0 0 0 0 if the IP Address is assigned dynamically and there is no connection to the Internet Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with the WAN IP Address 194 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS Click the Release to delete the network parameters and click the Renew button to obtaining network parameters gt gt Traffic Statistics The Router s traffic statistics e Received Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been received out from the WAN port e Received Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been received out from the WAN port e Sent Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been sent out from the WAN port e Sent Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been sent out from the WAN port System Up Time The length of the time since the Router was last powered on or reset Click the Refresh button to get the latest status and settings of the Router 8 3 Quick Setup Plea
184. etINnOS tutti fet eine eid Gadel 215 8 1 2 DHCP Client list 0c anieke noise Sethe etter eee sin Gentes 217 8 7 3 Address ReseivatiOne iaa aan 217 USB S ett ii ds 218 VI 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 12 8 13 8 14 8 15 8 16 8 8 1 Storage Shar ita A en ta 219 9 8 2 Media SON A cate 220 30 93 User Account 222 E RN 224 3 91 VIRUS VOS aid ii aida 224 39 27 Port TMOQEMING 5 aE RRE EE EEOAE teas A EA EO telat 226 SS OM A a 228 8 94 UPOP uri aci 229 DOCU AE EP E E NEE AAA erage aaa 230 8 10 1 Basic Security icon da eii AAEN A REANA AAEE EnA EEA PEKEN TARE ESAn t OE dd 230 8 10 2 Advanced SCW E fiat a E N 231 8 1073 Local Management cirio 233 8 10 4 Remote ManageMent ococccccncocccccononcncnononcnncnnnoncncnnnoncnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnn cn naar nncnnnannncnnnns 234 Parental Controls ireas aces cevedede AES a ENEA dd ed aaa 235 Access Control iuris tia 237 8 12 RU o iio e Mito doin aldo e 0 237 8 1224 OS a io e nt Le 0 240 AS O 242 8 12 4 Schedule iii ea 244 Advanced ROUTING a5 scene os ai 246 8 13 1 Static Routing Lis tucan a cantabiesitaaincceleanh dens eaey 246 8 13 2 System Routing Table neni E 247 BandwidthGontrolins sion ondaa dada la 248 3 14 1 Control Settings cti erie 248 8 142 RUIS Sta ti Ia A Gee eit 248 IP amp MAG Binding 14 A Aa 250 8151 Binding SEG id 250 8 15 2 VARPA biS Te aa aaan aa a ces aa Aa a A A A a A 252 Dipati DN Sy arar ea a AREIA ada taz 252 8 16 1 No lP DDNS rris piine
185. eway and DNS setting select Static IP The Static IP settings page will appear as shown in Figure 4 10 WAN Connection Type Static IP Y IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 MTU Size in bytes 1500 The defaultis 1500 do not change unless necessary Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Figure 4 10 WAN Static IP gt IP Address Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation provided by your ISP gt Subnet Mask Enter the subnet Mask in dotted decimal notation provided by your ISP usually is 255 255 255 0 gt Default Gateway Enter the gateway IP address in dotted decimal notation provided by your ISP 38 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA A ETT TS gt MTU Size The normal MTU Maximum Transmission Unit value for most Ethernet networks is 1500 Bytes It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP gt Primary Secondary DNS Optional Enter one or two DNS addresses in dotted decimal notation provided by your ISP Click the Save button to save your settings If your ISP provides a PPPoE connection select PPPoE Russia PPPoE option Then you should enter the following parameters Figure 4 11 WAN Connection Type PPPoE Russia PPPoE v PPPoE Connection User Name username Password s s m Confirm Password A Secondary Connection Disabled Dynam
186. f the Access Point you want to access and click Connect in the corresponding row For example the third item is selected The target network s SSID will be automatically filled into the corresponding box which is shown as the Figure 3 24 Then click Next AP List AP Count 16 COCOS CSS oa a CET CI pereira Y ps e pone ene MT ATTACK 4 4c 60 DE 32 63 8 P LINK_18F710 3048 PA2 PSK B 14 E6 E4 E3 87 64 P LINK_TEST 1 6dB 6 o o PA2 PSK Back Refresh Figure 3 28 AP List 27 TL WR710N MUI tote T N A MCL TT 4 The Finish page is shown as Figure 3 29 Click the Reboot button to make your wireless configuration take effect and finish the Quick Setup Quick Setup Finish Congratulations This device is now connecting you to the Internet For detail settings please click other menus if necessary The change of working mode config will not take effect until this device reboot Figure 3 29 Quick Setup Finish cf Note The operating distance or range of your wireless connection varies significantly based on the physical placement of the Router For best results place your Router e Near the center of the area in which your wireless stations will operate e In an elevated location such as a high shelf e Away from the potential sources of interference such as PCs microwaves and cordless phones e Away from large metal surfaces Failure to follow these guidelines can result in
187. f the Wireless MAC Filtering function enable deny the station to access You cannot change any of the values on this page To update this page and to show the current connected wireless stations click on the Refresh button If the numbers of connected wireless stations go beyond one page click the Next button to go to the next page and click the Previous button to return the previous page EP Note This page will be refreshed automatically every 5 seconds 8 7 DHCP DHCP DHCP Client List Address Reservation Figure 8 23 The DHCP menu There are three submenus under the DHCP menu shown in Figure 8 23 DHCP Settings DHCP Client List and Address Reservation Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 8 7 1 DHCP Settings Choose menu DHCP DHCP Settings and then you can configure the DHCP Server on the page as shown in Figure 8 24 The Router is set up by default as a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server which provides the TCP IP configuration for all the PC s that are connected to the Router in the LAN 215 TL WR710N MUITO TINA AN ETT TS DHCP Server Disable Enable Start IP Address 192 168 0 100 End IP Address 192 168 0 199 Address Lease Time 120 minutes 1 2880 minutes the default value is 120 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 Optional Default Domain Optional Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Secondary DNS
188. figurations please click the Advanced button and the page shown in Figure 4 12 will then appear 40 TL WR710N MUI keto T A AN ETA TITS PPPoE Advanced Settings MTU Size in bytes 1480 The default is 1480 do not change unless necessary Service Name AC Name C Use IP Address Specified by ISP ISP Specified IP Address 0 0 0 0 Detect Online Interval 0 Seconds 0 120 seconds the default is 0 0 means not detecting O Use The Following DNS Servers Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Save Back Figure 4 12 PPPoE Advanced Settings gt MTU Size The default MTU size is 1480 bytes which is usually fine It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP gt Service Name AC Name The service name and AC Access Concentrator name should not be configured unless you are sure it is necessary for your ISP In most cases leaving these fields blank will work gt ISP Specified IP Address If your ISP does not automatically assign IP addresses to the Router during login please click Use IP address specified by ISP check box and enter the IP address provided by your ISP in dotted decimal notation gt Detect Online Interval The Router will detect Access Concentrator online at every interval The default value is 0 You can input the value between 0 and 120 The value
189. files on the USB drive 63 There are two default user accounts that can access the Storage Sharing They are Administrator and Guest as shown in Figure 4 39 Administrator has read write access to Storage Sharing and can access FTP Server while Guest has read only access to Storage Sharing and cannot access TL WR710N MUI totes Cla Colbie Vem AY MCL TT FTP Server User Account Management Add New User User Name Password Storage Authority Modify admin admin Read and Write yes Edit guest guest Read Only no Edit Only Administrator can use a Web browser to transfer the files from a PC to the Writable shared Figure 4 39 User Account Management volume on the USB drive To add a new user account please follow the steps below 1 A WY N Click Add New User button and the screen will appear as shown in Figure 4 40 Self define a User Name Enter the password in the Password field Choose the Storage Authority from the drop down list Read and Write or Read Only Add or Modify User Account User Name l admin2 Password admin Storage Authority Read and Write v Figure 4 40 Add or Modify User Account gt User Name Type the user name that you want to give access to the USB drive The user name must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length gt Password Enter the password in the Password field The password must be composed of alphan
190. fresh the data displayed 247 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS 8 14Bandwidth Control Bandwidth Control Rule List Figure 8 71 The Bandwidth Control menu There are two submenus under the Bandwidth Control menu as shown in Figure 8 71 Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below 8 14 1 Control Settings Choose menu Bandwidth Control Control Settings you can configure the Egress Bandwidth and Ingress Bandwidth in the next screen Their values you configure should be less than 100000Kbps For optimal control of the bandwidth please select the right Line Type and ask your ISP for the total bandwidth of the egress and ingress Bandwidth Control Settings Enable Bandwidth Control Oo Line Type ADSL O Other Egress Bandwidth 512 Kbps Ingress Bandwidth 2048 Kbps Figure 8 72 Bandwidth Control Settings gt Enable Bandwidth Control Check this box so that the Bandwidth Control settings can take effect gt Line Type Select the right type for you network connection If you don t know how to choose please ask your ISP for the information gt Egress Bandwidth The upload speed through the WAN port gt ingress Bandwidth The download speed through the WAN port 8 14 2 Rule List Choose menu Bandwidth Control Rule List you can view and configure the Bandwidth
191. from the WLAN e WDS Status The status of WDS connection gt WAN This field displays the current settings or information for the WAN you can configure them in the Network gt WAN page e MAC Address The physical address of the WAN port as seen from the Internet e IP Address The current WAN Internet IP Address This field will be blank or 0 0 0 0 if the IP Address is assigned dynamically and there is no connection to the Internet e Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with the WAN IP Address Default Gateway The Gateway currently used by the Router is shown here When you use Dynamic IP as the connection Internet type the Renew button will be displayed here Click the Renew Button to obtain new IP parameters dynamically from the ISP And if you have got an IP address Release button will be displayed here Click the Release button to release the IP address the Router has obtained from the ISP gt DNS Server The DNS Domain Name System server IP addresses currently used by the Router gt Traffic Statistics The Router s traffic statistics e Received Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been received out from the WAN port e Received Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been received out from the WAN port e Sent Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been sent out from the WAN port e Sent Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been sent out from the WAN port gt System U
192. function can guarantee the packets with high priority messages being transmitted preferentially It is strongly recommended enabled gt Enable Short GI This function is recommended for it will increase the data capacity by reducing the guard interval time gt Enable AP Isolation This function isolate all connected wireless stations so that wireless stations cannot access each other through WLAN This function will be disabled if WDS Bridge is enabled cf Note If you are not familiar with the setting items in this page it s strongly recommended to keep the provided default values otherwise it may result in lower wireless network performance 6 6 5 Wireless Statistics Choose menu Wireless Wireless Statistics and then you can see the MAC Address Current Status Received Packets and Sent Packets for each connected wireless station Wireless Statistics Current Connected Wireless Stations numbers 1 ID MAC Address Current Status Received Packets Sent Packets Configure 1 70 73 CB 1F C8 C9 STA ASSOC 46 16 Previous Next Figure 6 14 Wireless Statistics 149 TL WR710N MUI LTS NI TINA AN ETT LTL gt MAC Address The connected wireless station s MAC address gt Current Status The connected wireless station s running status one of STA AUTH STA ASSOC STA JOINED WPA WPA PSK WPA2 WPA2 PSK AP UP AP DOWN Disconnected gt Received Packets Packets received by the station gt
193. function of the Router you must configure all computers on the LAN as Obtain an IP Address automatically When you choose the Smart IP DHCP mode in Network LAN the DHCP Server function will be disabled You will see the page as below 151 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL DHCP Settings DHCP Server Disable Enable Start IP Address 92 168 0 100 End IP Address 168 0 199 Address Lease Time 20 minutes 1 2880 minutes the default value is 120 Default Gateway 92 168 0 254 Optional Default Domain Optional Primary DNS Optional Secondary DNS 92 155 0 25 Optional Note The DHCP Settings function cannot be configured if you have choosed Smart IP DHCP in Network gt LAN in this situation the device will help you configure the DHCP automaticaly as you need Figure 6 17 DHCP Settings 6 7 2 DHCP Client List Choose menu DHCP DHCP Client List and then you can view the information about the clients attached to the Router in the screen as shown in Figure 6 18 DHCP Client List ID Client Name MAC Address Assigned IP Lease Time 1 tplink14129 C 62 6D F7 31 8D 192 168 0 100 01 15 47 2 Unknown 70 73 CB 1F C8 C9 192 168 0 101 01 56 32 Figure 6 18 DHCP Client List gt Client Name The name of the DHCP client gt MAC Address The MAC address of the DHCP client gt Assigned IP The IP address that the Router has allocated to the DHCP
194. g is Automatic which can select WPA Wi Fi Protected Access or WPA2 WPA version 2 automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e Encryption You can select Automatic TKIP or AES e Radius Server IP Enter the IP address of the Radius server Radius Port Enter the port that Radius server used e Radius Password Enter the password for the Radius server e Group Key Update Period Specify the group key update interval in seconds The value should be 30 or above Enter 0 to disable the update WEP It is based on the IEEE 802 11 standard e Type you can choose the type for the WEP security on the pull down list The default setting is Automatic which can select Shared Key or Open System authentication type automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e WEP Key Format Hexadecimal and ASCII formats are provided here Hexadecimal format stands for any combination of hexadecimal digits 0 9 a f A F in the specified length ASCII format stands for any combination of keyboard characters in the specified length WEP Key Password Select which of the four keys will be used and enter the matching WEP key that you create Make sure these values are identical on all wireless stations in your network e Key Type You can select the WEP key length 64 bit or 128 bit or 152 bit for encryption Disabled means this WEP key entry is invalid 64 bit You can enter 10 hexadecim
195. g the guard interval time gt Enable AP Isolation This function isolate all connected wireless stations so that wireless stations cannot access each other through WLAN This function will be disabled if WDS Bridge is enabled EP Note If you are not familiar with the setting items in this page it s strongly recommended to keep the provided default values otherwise it may result in lower wireless network performance 8 6 5 Wireless Statistics Choose menu Wireless Wireless Statistics and then you can see the MAC Address Current Status Received Packets and Sent Packets for each connected wireless station Wireless Statistics Current Connected Wireless Stations numbers 1 ID MAC Address Current Status Received Packets Sent Packets Configure 1 70 73 CB 1F C8 C9 STA ASSOC 46 16 Previous Next Figure 8 22 Wireless Statistics gt MAC Address The connected wireless station s MAC address 214 TL WR710N MUI LTS NIT AAN ETT LTL gt Current Status The connected wireless station s running status one of STA AUTH STA ASSOC STA JOINED WPA WPA PSK WPA2 WPA2 PSK AP UP AP DOWN Disconnected gt Received Packets Packets received by the station gt Sent Packets Packets sent by the station gt Configure The button is used for loading the item to the Wireless MAC Filtering list e Allow If the Wireless MAC Filtering function enable allow the station to access e Deny I
196. ge 2 In Mode field select MAC Address from the drop down list 3 In Host Description field create a unique description for the host e g Host_1 4 In MAC Address field enter 00 11 22 33 44 AA 5 Click Save to complete the settings Then you will go back to the Host Settings page and see the following list 82 TL WR710N MUI LTS NI TINA AN ETT TLL Host Settings ID Host Description Information Modify 1 Host_1 MAC 00 11 22 33 44 AA Edit Delete Add New Delete All Previous Next Current No 1 Y Page Figure 4 63 Host Settings 4 13 3 Target Choose menu Access Control Target you can view and set a Target list in the screen as shown in Figure 4 64 The target list is necessary for the Access Restriction Rule Target Settings 1D Target Description Information Modify Add New Delete All Previous Next Current No 11 v Page Figure 4 64 Target Settings Target Description Here displays the description about the target and this description is unique Information The target can be IP address port or domain name Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To add a new entry please follow the steps below 1 2 Click the Add New button In Mode field select IP Address or Domain Name e If you select IP Address the screen shown is Figure 4 65 1 In Target Description field create a unique description for the target e g Target_1 2 In IP A
197. gh WLAN This function will be disabled if WDS Bridge is enabled c Note If you are not familiar with the setting items in this page it s strongly recommended to keep the provided default values otherwise it may result in lower wireless network performance 5 7 5 Wireless Statistics Choose menu Wireless Wireless Statistics and then you can see the MAC Address Current Status Received Packets and Sent Packets for each connected wireless station gt gt Wireless Statistics Current Connected Wireless Stations numbers 1 ID MAC Address Current Status Received Packets Sent Packets Configure 1 70 73 CB 1F C8 C9 STA ASSOC 46 16 Previous Next Figure 5 17 Wireless Statistics MAC Address The connected wireless station s MAC address Current Status The connected wireless station s running status one of STA AUTH STA ASSOC STA JOINED WPA WPA PSK WPA2 WPA2 PSK AP UP AP DOWN Disconnected Received Packets Packets received by the station Sent Packets Packets sent by the station Configure The button is used for loading the item to the Wireless MAC Filtering list You cannot change any of the values on this page To update this page and to show the current connected wireless stations click on the Refresh button 121 TL WR710N MUI LTS NI TINA AN ETT TLL Ifthe numbers of connected wireless stations go beyond one page click the Next button to go to the next page and
198. gs of the Router 6 3 Quick Setup Please refer to Section 3 2 Quick Installation Guide 6 4 Working Mode The Router supports five operation mode types Wireless Router Access Point Repeater Client and Wireless Client Router Please select one you want Click Save to save your choice which is shown as Figure 5 7 Working Mode Wireless Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection via ADSLUCable Modem O Access Point Transform your existing wired network to a wireless network Repeater Extend your existing wireless coverage by relaying wireless signal Client Acting as a Wireless Adapter to connect your wired devices e g XbowPS3 to a wireless network WISP Client Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP Save Figure 6 3 Working Mode gt Wireless Router The wireless Router Mode In this mode the device enables multi user to share Internet via DSL Cable Modem The only wired port works as WAN gt Access Point The wireless access point mode gt Repeater The wireless Repeater Mode It could extend the range of wireless network gt Client The Client Mode The computer connected by Ethernet could get access to an AP by Client mode 140 TL WR710N MUI LTS INTA AN ETT LTL gt WISP Client Router In this mode the device enables multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP 6 5 Network Figure 6 4 the Network men
199. gt NAT Network Address Translation NAT technology translates IP addresses of a local area network to a different IP address for the Internet 273 TL WR710N MUI LTS II TINA AN ETT TLL PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE is a protocol for connecting remote hosts to the Internet over an always on connection by simulating a dial up connection SSID A Service Set Identification is a thirty two character maximum alphanumeric key identifying a wireless local area network For the wireless devices in a network to communicate with each other all devices must be configured with the same SSID This is typically the configuration parameter for a wireless PC card It corresponds to the ESSID in the wireless Access Point and to the wireless network name WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy A data privacy mechanism based on a 64 bit or 128 bit or 152 bit shared key algorithm as described in the IEEE 802 11 standard Wi Fi A trade name for the 802 11b wireless networking standard given by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance WECA see http www wi fi net an industry standards group promoting interoperability among 802 11b devices WLAN Wireless Local Area Network A group of computers and associated devices communicate with each other wirelessly which network serving users are limited in a local area 274
200. hange the router s default password to a very secure password 234 TL WR710N MUI LTS NI TINA AN ETT TLL 8 11 Parental Control Choose menu Parental Control and you can configure the parental control in the screen as shown in Figure 8 49 The Parental Control function can be used to control the internet activities of the child limit the child to access certain websites and restrict the time of surfing Parental Control Settings Non Parental PCs not listed will not be able to access the Internet Parental Control Disable Enable MAC Address of Parental PC MAC Address of Your PC l6 c 62 60 f7 31 8d Copy To Above ID MAC address Website Description Schedule Status Modify Add New Enable All Disable All Delete A Previous Next Current No 4 vi Page Figure 8 49 Parental Control Settings gt Parental Control Check Enable if you want this function to take effect otherwise check Disable gt MAC Address of Parental PC In this field enter the MAC address of the controlling PC or you can make use of the Copy To Above button below gt MAC Address of Your PC This field displays the MAC address of the PC that is managing this Router If the MAC Address of your adapter is registered you can click the Copy To Above button to fill this address to the MAC Address of Parental PC field above gt Website Description Description of the allowed website for the PC controlled
201. he Add or Modify Parental Control Entry page e Click Add New button e Enter 00 11 22 33 44 AA in the MAC Address of Child PC field e Enter Allow Google in the Website Description field e Enter www google com in the Allowed Domain Name field e Select Schedule_1 you create just now from the Effective Time drop down list e In Status field select Enable 4 Click Save to complete the settings Then you will go back to the Parental Control Settings page and see the following list as shown in Figure 8 51 ID MAC address Website Description Schedule Status Modify 1 00 11 22 33 44 BB Allow Google Schedule_1 Edit Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Current No 4 w Page Figure 8 51 8 12 Access Control Access Control Host Target Schedule Figure 8 52 The Access Control menu There are four submenus under the Access Restriction menu as shown in Figure 8 52 Rule Host Target and Schedule Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 8 12 1 Rule Choose menu Access Control gt Rule you can view and set Access Restriction rules in the screen as shown in Figure 8 53 237 Vv Vv VV WV gt TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL Access Control Rule Management C Enable Internet Access Control Default Filter Policy O Allow the packets specified by any enabled access control policy to pa
202. hedule_1 In Day field check the Select Days radio button and then select Sat and Sun In Time field enter 1800 in Start Time field and 2000 in Stop Time field Click Save to complete the settings Then you will go back to the Schedule Settings page and see the following list Schedule Settings ID Schedule Description Day Time Modify 1 Schedule_1 Sat Sun 18 00 20 00 Edit Delete Add New Delete All Prevoius Next Current No 1 v Page Figure 4 70 Schedule Settings 86 TL WR710N MUI LTS T A ETA TITS 4 14 Advanced Routing Advanced Routing System Routing Table Figure 4 71 The Advanced Routing Menu There are two submenus under the Network menu shown in Figure 4 71 Static Routing List and System Routing Table Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 4 14 1 Static Routing List Choose menu Static Routing and you can configure the static route in the next screen shown in Figure 4 72 A static route is a pre determined path that network information must travel to reach a specific host or network Static Routing 1D Destination Network Subnet Mask Default Gateway Status Modify Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 4 72 Static Routing To add static routing entries follow the steps below 1 Click Add New shown in Figure 4 72 you will see the following screen Figure 4 73 Add or Modify a Stat
203. hoose TKIP encryption you will find a notice in red as shown in Figure 5 13 116 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLEL WPA WPA2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Recommended he Encryption TKIP i Wireless Password You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters between 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period 0 Seconds Keep it default if you are not sure minimum is 30 0 means no update We do not recommend using the TKIP encryption if this device operates in 802 11n mode due to the fact that TKIP is not supported by 802 11n specification Figure 5 13 WPA WPA2 Enterprise It s based on Radius Server e Version you can choose the version of the WPA security from the pull down list The default setting is Automatic which can select WPA Wi Fi Protected Access or WPA2 WPA version 2 automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e Encryption You can select Automatic TKIP or AES e Radius Server IP Enter the IP address of the Radius server Radius Port Enter the port that Radius server used e Radius Password Enter the password for the Radius server e Group Key Update Period Specify the group key update interval in seconds The value should be 30 or above Enter 0 to disable the update WEP It is based on the IEEE 802 11 standard e Type you can choose the type for the WEP security on the pull down list The default setting is
204. ia Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 8 32 Media Server Setting 2 Click the Start button to start the media server and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 8 33 Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Started E Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 8 33 Media Server Setting 221 TL WR710N MUI totes Clam Cori Cle Ved AY AN ETA CIL TLEL 3 Click the Add share folder button to specify a folder as the search path of media server The screen will then appear as shown in Figure 8 34 Add New Folder Display Name video Partition C Share entire partition Folder Location imy share Select Folder upper O photo video Figure 8 34 Add New Folder Display Name You can enter a display name for the share folder Share entire partition Choose this option and then the folders contained in this partition will all be shared Folder Location Displays the location of this folder Select Check the radio button to select the folder to share Folder Displays folders that are in current path Upper Click this button to get into the upper folder Save Click this button to save your settings and the page will be redirected to the media server config
205. ic Route Entry Destination Network Subnet Mask Default Gateway Status Enabled v Figure 4 73 Add or Modify a Static Route Entry 2 Enter the following data gt Destination Network The Destination IP Address is the address of the network or host that you want to assign to a static route 87 3 4 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS gt Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask determines which portion of an IP Address is the network portion and which portion is the host portion gt Default Gateway This is the IP Address of the gateway device that allows for contact between the Router and the network or host Select Enabled or Disabled for this entry on the Status drop down list Click the Save button to make the entry take effect Click the Delete button to delete the entry Click the Enable All button to enable all the entries Click the Disable All button to disable all the entries Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries Click the Previous button to view the information in the previous screen click the Next button to view the information in the next screen 4 14 2 System Routing Table Choose menu Advanced Routing System Routing Table and you can views all of the valid route entries in use The Destination IP address Subnet Mask Gateway and Interface will be displayed for each entry System Routing Table ID Destination Network S
206. icIP Static IP For Dual Access Russia PPPoE Wan Connection Mode Connect on Demand Max Idle Time 1s minutes 0 means remain active at all times Connect Automatically Time based Connecting Period of Time from p 0 HH MM to 3 log HH MM Connect Manually Maxldle Time 15 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Disconnect Disconnected Save Advanced Figure 4 11 WAN PPPoE Russia PPPoE gt User Name Password Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP These fields are case sensitive gt Confirm Password Enter again the Password provided by your ISP to ensure the password you entered is correct gt Secondary Connection It s available only for PPPoE Connection If your ISP provides an extra Connection type such as Dynamic Static IP to connect to a local area network then you can check the radio button of Dynamic Static IP to activate this secondary connection e Disabled The Secondary Connection is disabled by default so there is PPPoE connection only This is recommended 39 TL WR710N MUI tote T A A ETA eda TLEL e Dynamic IP You can check this radio button to use Dynamic IP as the secondary connection to connect to the local area network provided by ISP e Static IP You can check this radio button to use Static IP as the secondary connection to connect to the local area network provided by ISP Connect on Demand In this mode
207. ick the Save button when finished Click the Clear All button to clear all 4 18 8 System Log This page allows you to query the logs of the router 102 TL WR710N MUI tole T A MCL TT System Log Auto Mail Feature Disabled Mail Settings Log Type ALL xj Log Level ALL v Index Time Type Level Log Content 171 1st day 02 57 44 DHCP INFO DHCPC DHCP Service unavailable recv no OFFER 170 1st day 02 57 42 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag 1 169 1st day 02 57 40 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag 1 168 1st day 02 57 36 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag O 167 1st day 02 57 34 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with requestip 0 and unicast flag 0 166 1st day 02 57 32 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag 0 Time 2013 01 01 3 07 43 11264s H Ver WR710N v2 00000000 S Ver 3 15 11 Build 131125 Rel 50653n L 192 168 0 254 M 255 255 255 0 W1 DHCP W 0 0 0 0 M 0 0 0 0 G 0 0 0 0 Mail Log CurrentNo 1 w Page Figure 4 96 System Log gt Refresh Refresh the page to show the latest log list gt Save Log Click to save all the logs in a txt file gt Mail Log Click to send an email of current logs manually according to the address and validation information set in Mail Settings The result will be shown in the later log soon gt Clear Log Al
208. igure 3 2 Failure result of Ping command Please check the connection following these steps 1 Is the connection between your PC and the Router correct 2 Is the TCP IP configuration for your PC correct Pe i TL WR710N MUI tele T A MCL TITS 3 2 Quick Installation Guide With a Web based utility it is easy to configure and manage the TL WR710N WiFi Pocket Router AP TV Adapter Repeater The Web based utility can be used on any Windows Macintosh or UNIX OS with a Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer Mozilla Firefox or Apple Safari 1 To access the configuration utility open a web browser and type in the default address http tplinklogin net in the address field of the browser After a moment a login window will appear similar to the Figure 3 3 Enter admin for the User Name and Password both in lower case letters Then click the OK button or press the Enter key E Windows Security The server tplinklogin net at TP LINK WiFi Pocket Router AP TV Adapter Repeater WR710N requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection admin V Remember my credentials Figure 3 3 Login Windows E Note If the above screen does not pop up it means that your Web browser has been set to a proxy Go to Tools menu gt Internet Options gt Connect
209. igure more wireless parameters More Advanced Wireless Settings Mode 11bgn mixed v Channel Width Auto v Channel Auto Y Figure 3 13 Quick Setup More Advanced Wireless Settings gt Mode This field determines the wireless mode which the Router works on gt Channel Width Select any channel width from the drop down list The default setting is automatic which can adjust the channel width for your clients automatically gt Channel This field determines which operating frequency will be used The default channel is set to Auto so the AP will choose the best channel automatically It is not necessary to change the wireless channel unless you notice interference problems with another nearby access point These settings are only for basic wireless parameters For advanced settings please refer to 4 7 Wireless 18 TL WR710N PWT T A AN ETA IL LTL 4 The Finish page is shown as Figure 3 14 Click the Reboot button to make your wireless configuration take effect and finish the Quick Setup Quick Setup Finish Congratulations This device is now connecting you to the Internet For detail settings please click other menus if necessary The change of working mode config will not take effect until this device reboot Figure 3 14 Quick Setup Finish 3 2 2 Access Point Mode When you choose Access Point on Working Mode page in Figure 3 5 take the following steps 1 Click Next in
210. ile System Folder Delete Figure 4 35 Media Server Setting gt Server Name The name of this Media Server gt Server Status Indicates the Media Server s current status started or stopped You can click the Start button to start the Media Server and click the Stop button to stop it gt Name The display name of this folder gt File System The file system type on the partition can be FAT32 or NTFS gt Folder The real full path of the specified folder gt Delete You can delete the share folder by click Delete To set up your media server please follow the instructions below 1 Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 4 36 Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 4 36 Media Server Setting 2 Click the Start button to start the media server and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 4 37 Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Started E Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Figure 4 37 Media Server Setting 62 TL WR710N MUI kote TN A AN ETA ILa LTL 3 Click the Add share folder button to specify a folder as the search path of media server The screen will then appea
211. ion Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 4 8 1 DHCP Settings Choose menu DHCP DHCP Settings and then you can configure the DHCP Server on the page as shown in Figure 4 28 The Router is set up by default as a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server which provides the TCP IP configuration for all the PC s that are connected to the Router on the LAN 56 TL WR710N MUITO TINA AN ETT TS DHCP Server Disable Enable Start IP Address 192 168 0 100 End IP Address 192 168 0 199 Address Lease Time 120 minutes 1 2880 minutes the default value is 120 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 Optional Default Domain Optional Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Secondary DNS oo00 Optional Figure 4 28 DHCP Settings DHCP Server Enable or Disable the DHCP server If you disable the Server you must have another DHCP server within your network or else you must configure the computer manually Start IP Address Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to start with when assigning IP addresses 192 168 0 100 is the default start address End IP Address Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to end with when assigning IP addresses 192 168 0 199 is the default end address Address Lease Time The Address Lease Time is the amount of time a network user will be allowed connection to the Router with their current dynamic IP Address
212. ions gt LAN Settings in the screen that appears cancel the Using Proxy checkbox and click OK to finish it 2 After a successful login you can click the Quick Setup menu to quickly configure your Router The quick setup will tell you howto configure the basic network parameters To continue please clickthe Next button To exit please click the Exit button Nex Figure 3 4 Quick Setup 12 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLEL 3 Click Next and then Working Mode page will appear shown in Figure 3 5 Working Mode Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt WAN Connection Type gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish Wireless Router Access Point Repeater Client 00000 WISP Client Router Next Figure 3 5 Quick Setup Working Mode E Note The Router supports five working modes for multi user to access the Internet Wireless Router Access Point Repeater Client and WISP Client Router In Wireless Router mode the device enables multiple users to share the Internet connection via ADSL Cable Modem In Access Point mode this device can be connected to a wired network and transform the wired access into wireless that multiple devices can share together In Repeater mode the device will relay data to an associated root AP In Client mode the device will act as a wireless station to enable wired host s to access AP In WISP Client Router mode the device enables multiple users to share Internet conn
213. ions will not take effect 97 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS gt The time will be lost if the router is turned off gt The router will obtain GMT automatically from Internet if it has already connected to Internet 4 18 2 Diagnostic Choose menu System Tools Diagnostic you can transact Ping or Traceroute function to check connectivity of your network in the following screen Diagnostic Tools Diagnostic Parameters Diagnostic Tool O Ping Traceroute IP Address Domain Name Ping Count la 1 50 Ping Packet Size 64 4 1472 Bytes Ping Timeout Boo 100 2000 milliseconds Traceroute Max TTL 20 1 30 Diagnostic Results a This device is ready Figure 4 89 Diagnostic Tools gt Diagnostic Tool Check the radio button to select one diagnostic too e Ping This diagnostic tool troubleshoots connectivity reachability and name resolution to a given host or gateway e Traceroute This diagnostic tool tests the performance of a connection Note You can use ping traceroute to test both numeric IP address or domain name If pinging tracerouting the IP address is successful but pinging tracerouting the domain name is not you might have a name resolution problem In this case ensure that the domain name you are specifying can be resolved by using Domain Name System DNS queries gt IP Address Domain Name Type the destination IP address such as 20
214. ireless Advanced Choose menu Wireless Wireless Advanced and then you can configure the advanced settings of your wireless network Transmit Power High v Beacon Interval loo 40 1000 RTS Threshold 2346 256 2346 Fragmentation Threshold 2346 256 2346 DTIM Interval ao 1 255 Enable WMM Enable Short GI C Enable AP Isolation Save Wireless Advanced Figure 4 25 Wireless Advanced Transmit Power Here you can specify the transmit power of Router You can select High Middle or Low which you would like High is the default setting and is recommended Beacon Interval Enter a value between 20 1000 milliseconds for Beacon Interval here The beacons are the packets sent by the Router to synchronize a wireless network Beacon Interval value determines the time interval of the beacons The default value is 100 RTS Threshold Here you can specify the RTS Request to Send Threshold If the packet is larger than the specified RTS Threshold size the Router will send RTS frames to a 54 TL WR710N MUI kote T N A MCL TT particular receiving station and negotiate the sending of a data frame The default value is 2346 gt Fragmentation Threshold This value is the maximum size determining whether packets will be fragmented Setting the Fragmentation Threshold too low may result in poor network performance because of excessive packets 2346 is the default setting and is
215. ireless MAC Filtering Wireless Advanced Wireless Statistics Figure 5 10 Wireless menu 113 TL WR710N MUI LTS NI TNA AN ETT LTL There are five submenus under the Wireless menu shown in Figure 5 10 Wireless Settings Wireless Security Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless Advanced and Wireless Statistics Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 5 7 1 Wireless Settings Choose menu Wireless Wireless Settings and then you can configure the basic settings for the wireless network on this page Wireless Settings Wireless Network Name TP LINK_010630 Also called the SSID Region United Kingdom v Channel Auto v Mode 11bgn mixed Channel Width Auto v Enable Wireless Radio Enable SSID Broadcast Save Figure 5 11 Wireless Settings AP gt Wireless Network Name Enter a string of up to 32 characters The same name of SSID Service Set Identification must be assigned to all wireless devices in your network The default SSID is set to be TP LINK_XXXXXX XXXXXX indicates the last unique six numbers of each Routers MAC address But it is recommended strongly that you change your networks name SSID to a different value This value is case sensitive For example TEST is NOT the same as fest gt Region Select your region from the pull down list This field specifies the region where the wireless function of the Router can be used
216. k the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table Click the Next button to go to the next page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Add or Modify a Host Entry Mode IP Address J Host Description LANIP Address El Figure 8 57 Add or Modify a Host Entry Add or Modify a Host Entry Mode MAC Address Y Host Description MAC Address Figure 8 58 Add or Modify a Host Entry For example If you desire to restrict the internet activities of host with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA you should first follow the settings below 1 Click Add New button in Figure 8 56 to enter the Add or Modify a Host Entry page 2 In Mode field select MAC Address from the drop down list 3 In Host Description field create a unique description for the host e g Host_1 4 In MAC Address field enter 00 11 22 33 44 AA 5 Click Save to complete the settings Then you will go back to the Host Settings page and see the following list 241 TL WR710N MUI LTS NI TINA AN ETT TLL Host Settings ID Host Description Information Modify 1 Host_1 MAC 00 11 22 33 44 AA Edit Delete Add New Delete All Previous Next Current No 1 Y Page Figure 8 59 Host Settings 8 12 3 Target Choose menu Access Control Target you can view and set a Target list in the screen as shown in Figure 4 64 The target list is necessary for
217. keep the default Enabled e L2TP Passthrough Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol L2TP is the method used to enable Point to Point sessions via the Internet on the Layer 2 level To allow L2TP tunnels to pass through the Router keep the default Enabled e IPSec Passthrough Internet Protocol Security IPSec is a suite of protocols for ensuring private secure communications over Internet Protocol IP networks through the use of cryptographic security services To allow IPSec tunnels to pass through the Router keep the default Enabled gt ALG It is recommended to enable Application Layer Gateway ALG because ALG allows customized Network Address Translation NAT traversal filters to be plugged into the gateway to support address and port translation for certain application layer control data protocols such as FTP TFTP H323 etc e FTP ALG To allow FTP clients and servers to transfer data across NAT keep the default Enable e TFTP ALG To allow TFTP clients and servers to transfer data across NAT keep the default Enable e H323 ALG To allow Microsoft NetMeeting clients to communicate across NAT keep the default Enable Click the Save button to save your settings 8 10 2 Advanced Security Choose menu Security Advanced Security you can protect the Router from being attacked by TCP SYN Flood UDP Flood and ICMP Flood in the screen as shown in Figure 8 46 231 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS Ad
218. kup 8 Restore Reboot Password and System Log Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below 7 9 1 Diagnostic Choose menu System Tools Diagnostic and then you can transact Ping or Traceroute function to check connectivity of your network in the following screen Diagnostic Tools Diagnostic Parameters Diagnostic Tool Ping Traceroute IP Address Domain Name Ping Count 4 1 50 Ping Packet Size 64 4 1472 Bytes Ping Timeout 800 100 2000 Milliseconds Traceroute Max TTL d 1 30 Diagnostic Results The Router is ready AN Figure 7 26 Diagnostic Tools 185 TL WR710N MUI kote T A ETA TT gt Diagnostic Tool Check the radio button to select one diagnostic tool e Ping This diagnostic tool troubleshoots connectivity reachability and name resolution to a given host or gateway e Traceroute This diagnostic tool tests the performance of a connection E Note You can use ping traceroute to test both numeric IP address or domain name lf pinging tracerouting the IP address is successful but pinging tracerouting the domain name is not you might have a name resolution problem In this case ensure that the domain name you are specifying can be resolved by using Domain Name System DNS queries gt IP Address Domain Name Type the
219. l notation of the computer for which you want to reserve an IP address Click the Save button Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry MAC Address Reserved IP Address Status Enabled Figure 7 15 Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete Modify the information Click the Save button Click the Enable Disable All button to make all entries enabled disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page and Click the Previous button to return the previous page 7 8 USB Settings USB Settings Media Server User Accounts Figure 7 16 The USB Settings menu There are three submenus under the USB Settings menu shown in Figure 7 16 Storage Sharing Media Server and User Accounts Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions 178 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT TLEL 7 8 1 Storage Sharing Choose menu USB Settings Storage Sharing you can configure a USB disk drive attached to the router and view volume and share such properties as share name capacity used space and free space on this page as shown below Storage Sharing Service Status Started CO Access shared storage with password Volume Capacity Used
220. l the logs will be deleted from this device permanently not just from the page 4 18 9 Statistics The Statistics page displays the network traffic of each PC in LAN including total traffic and traffic of the last Packets Statistic interval seconds 103 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL Statistics Current Statistics Status Disabled Packets Statistics Interval 5 60 10 w Seconds Auto refresh Sorted Rules Sorted by Current Bytes Y Reset All Delete All Total Current IP Address MAC Address Packets Bytes Packets Bytes ICMP Tx UDP Tx SYN Tx The current listis empty 5 vlentriesperpage CurrentNo 1 v Page L Figure 4 97 Statistics gt Current Statistics Status Enable or Disable The default value is disabled To enable click the Enable button If disabled the function of DoS protection in Security settings will be ineffective gt Packets Statistics Interval The default value is 10 Select a value between 5 and 60 seconds in the pull down list The Packets Statistic interval indicates the time section of the packets statistic gt Sorted Rules Here displays sort as desired Statistics Table IP Address The IP Address displayed with statistics Packet The total amount of packets received and transmitted by the Total router Bytes The total amount of bytes received and transmitted by the router Packets The total amount of p
221. l times enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet connection terminates gt Connect Automatically Connect automatically after the Router is disconnected To use this option check the radio button gt Connect Manually You can configure the Router to make it connect or disconnect manually After a specified period of inactivity Max Idle Time the Router will disconnect from your Internet connection and you will not be able to re establish your connection automatically as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again To use this option check the radio button If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes that you wish to have the Internet connecting last unless a new link is requested Caution Sometimes the connection cannot be disconnected although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background Click the Save button to save your settings If your ISP provides PPTP connection please select PPTP Russia PPTP option And you should enter the following parameters Figure 4 15 44 WAN Connection Type PPTP Russia PPTP w User Name username Password eununnna Disconnect Disconnected Dynamic IP O Static IP Server IP Address Name IP Addre
222. le If you desire that the child PC with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA can access www google com on Saturday only while the parent PC with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 BB is without any restriction you should follow the settings below 1 Click Parental Control menu on the left to enter the Parental Control Settings page Check Enable and enter the MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 BB in the MAC Address of Parental PC field 177 TL WR710N MUI totes TA MCL TITS 2 Click Access Restriction Schedule on the left to enter the Schedule Settings page Click Add New button to create a new schedule with Schedule Description is Schedule_1 Day is Sat and Time is all day 24 hours 3 Click Parental Control menu on the left to go back to the Add or Modify Parental Control Entry page e Click Add New button e Enter 00 11 22 33 44 AA in the MAC Address of Child PC field e Enter Allow Google in the Website Description field e Enter www google com in the Allowed Domain Name field e Select Schedule_1 you create just now from the Effective Time drop down list e In Status field select Enable 4 Click Save to complete the settings Then you will go back to the Parental Control Settings page and see the following list as shown in Figure 4 55 ID MAC address Website Description Schedule Status Modify 1 00 11 22 33 44 BB Allow Google Schedule_1 Edit Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete
223. lick Save to complete the settings ID Rule Name Host Target Schedule Status Modify 1 Rule_1 Host 1 Target 1 Schedule 1 Edit Delete setup Wizard Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Figure 8 55 Rule Settings 8 12 2 Host Choose menu Access Control Host you can view and set a Host list in the screen as shown in Figure 8 56 The host list is necessary for the Access Restriction Rule Host Settings 1D Host Description Information Modify Add New Delete A Previous Next Current No 4 v Page Figure 8 56 Host Settings gt Host Description Here displays the description of the host and this description is unique gt Information Here displays the information about the host It can be IP or MAC gt Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To add a new entry please follow the steps below 1 Click the Add New button 2 In the Mode field select IP Address or MAC Address If you select IP Address the screen shown is Figure 8 57 1 In Host Description field create a unique description for the host e g Host_1 240 TL WR710N MUI kote T A AN ETA TITS 2 In LAN IP Address field enter the IP address e Ifyou select MAC Address the screen shown is Figure 8 58 1 In Host Description field create a unique description for the host e g Host_1 2 In MAC Address field enter the MAC address 3 Click the Save button to complete the settings Clic
224. lume 1 8 is mapping to USB port1 and Volume 9 16 is mapping to USB port2 gt Capacity The storage capacity of the USB driver gt Used The used space of the USB driver gt Free The available space of the USB driver gt Use The percentage of the used space gt Shared Indicates the shared or non shared status of the volume When the volume is shared you can click the Disable to stop sharing the volume when volume is non shared you can click the Enable button to share the volume Click the Start button to start the Network Sharing service Click the Stop button to stop the Network Sharing service Click the Eject Disk button to safely remove the USB storage device that is connected to USB port This takes the drive offline A message as shown in Figure 5 26 will appear on your web browser when it is safe to detach the USB disk Message from webpage O This operation will disable Media Server Are you sure to continue Figure 5 26 Safe Unplug Message 126 TL WR710N MUI totes T A MCL TITS Click the Rescan button to start a new scan Follow the instructions below to set up your router as a file server 1 A WY N Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router Click the Rescan button to find the USB drive that has been attached to the router Click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service Click the Enable button under Shared to enable the disk to
225. m the Host drop down list or choose Click Here To Add New Host List Select a target from the Target drop sown list or choose Click Here To Add New Target List Select a schedule from the Schedule drop down list or choose Click Here To Add New Schedule 238 TL WR710N MUI tole T A ETA TIT In the Action field select Deny or Allow In the Status field select Enabled or Disabled to enable or disable your entry Click the Save button Click the Enable All button to enable all the rules in the list Click the Disable All button to disable all the rules in the list Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table You can change the entry s order as desired Fore entries are before hind entries Enter the ID number in the first box you want to move and another ID number in second box you want to move to and then click the Move button to change the entry s order Click the Next button to go to the next page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Add Internet Access Control Entry Rule Name Host p Click Here To Add New Host List Target Any Target Y click Here To Add New Target List Schedule Anytime V Click Here To Add New Schedule Status Enabled Y Save Back Figure 8 54 Add or Modify Internet Access Restriction Entry For example If you desire to allow the host with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA to access www google com only f
226. main optional Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 optional Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 optional Figure 7 11 DHCP Settings gt DHCP Server Enable or Disable the DHCP server If you disable the Server you must have another DHCP server within your network or else you must configure the computer manually 175 TL WR710N MUI TS T A ETA TT TLL Start IP Address Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to start with when assigning IP addresses 192 168 0 100 is the default start address End IP Address Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to end with when assigning IP addresses 192 168 0 199 is the default end address Address Lease Time The Address Lease Time is the amount of time a network user will be allowed connection to the Router with their current dynamic IP Address Enter the amount of time in minutes and the user will be leased this dynamic IP Address After the time is up the user will be automatically assigned a new dynamic IP address The range of the time is 1 2880 minutes The default value is 120 minutes Default Gateway Optional It is suggested to input the IP address of the LAN port of the Router The default value is 192 168 0 254 Default Domain Optional Input the domain name of your network Primary DNS Optional Input the DNS IP address provided by your ISP or consult your ISP Secondary DNS Optional Input the IP address of another DNS server if your ISP provides two DNS serve
227. mal notation of the computer for which you want to reserve an IP address 3 Click the Save button Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry MAC Address Reserved IP Address Status Enabled Figure 4 31 Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable Disable All button to make all entries enabled disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page and Click the Previous button to return the previous page 4 9 USB Settings USB Settings Media Server User Accounts Figure 4 32 The USB Settings menu There are three submenus under the USB Settings menu shown in Figure 4 32 Storage Sharing Media Server and User Accounts Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions 59 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT TLEL 4 9 1 Storage Sharing Choose menu USB Settings Storage Sharing you can configure a USB disk drive attached to the router and view volume and share such properties as share name capacity used space and free space on this page as shown below Storage Sharing Service Status Started CO Access shared storage with password Volume Capacity Used Free Use
228. me New Password Confirm New Password Figure 7 32 Password It is strongly recommended that you should change the factory default user name and password of the Router because all users who try to access the Router s Web based utility or Quick Setup will be prompted for the Router s default user name and password E Note The new user name and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and not include any spaces Enter the new Password twice to confirm Click the Save button when finished Click the Clear All button to clear all 190 TL WR710N MUI LTS NI TIN AR AN ETT LTL 7 9 7 System Log Choose menu System Tools System Log and then you can view the logs of the Router System Log Auto Mail Feature Disabled Mail Settings Log Type ALL xj Log Level ALL v Index Time Type Level Log Content 171 1st day 02 57 44 DHCP INFO DHCPC DHCP Serice unavailable recv no OFFER 170 1st day 02 57 42 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag 1 169 1st day 02 57 40 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with requestip 0 and unicast flag 1 168 1st day 02 57 36 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag 0 167 1st day 02 57 34 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag 0 166 1st day 02 57 32 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag O Time 2013 01 01 3 07 43 11264s H Ver WR710N v2 00
229. min gt The default Password admin gt The default IP Address 192 168 0 254 gt The default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Cf Note All changed settings will be lost when defaults are restored 134 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL 5 10 4 Backup 8 Restore Choose menu System Tools Backup amp Restore and then you can save the current configuration of the Router as a backup file and restore the configuration via a backup file as shown in Figure 5 38 Backup amp Restore Configuration Backup Configuration Fe Figure 5 38 Backup 8 Restore Configuration gt Click the Backup button to save all configuration settings as a backup file in your local computer gt To upgrade the Router s configuration follow these instructions e Click the Browse button to locate the update file for the Router or enter the exact path to the Setting file in the text box e Click the Restore button Note The current configuration will be covered by the uploading configuration file The upgrade process lasts for 20 seconds and the Router will restart automatically Keep the Router on during the upgrading process to prevent any damage 5 10 5 Reboot Choose menu System Tools Reboot and then you can click the Reboot button to reboot the Router via the next screen Click this button to reboot this device Figure 5 39 Reboot the Router Some settings of the Router will take
230. mputers in LAN from accessing the Router Local Management Management Rules Allthe PCs on the LAN are allowed to access the Router s Web Based Utility O Only the PCs listed can browse the built in web pages to perform Administrator tasks MAC 1 MAC 2 MAC 3 MAC 4 Your PC s MAC Address 6C 62 6D F 31 81 Add Figure 8 47 Local Management By default the radio button All the PCs on the LAN are allowed to access the Router s Web Based Utility is checked If you want to allow PCs with specific MAC Addresses to access the Setup page of the Router s Web Based Utility locally from inside the network check the radio button Only the PCs listed can browse the built in web pages to perform Administrator tasks and then enter each MAC Address in a separate field The format for the MAC Address is XX XX XX XX XX XX X is any hexadecimal digit Only the PCs with MAC address listed can 233 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL use the password to browse the built in web pages to perform Administrator tasks while all the others will be blocked After click the Add button your PC s MAC Address will be placed in the list above Click the Save button to save your settings E Note If your PC is blocked but you want to access the Router again press and hold the WPS button for more than 5 seconds to reset the Router to factory defaults 8 10 4 Remote Management You can config
231. n immediately gt Ignore Ping Packet From WAN Port Enable or Disable Ignore Ping Packet From WAN Port The default setting is disabled If enabled the ping packet from the Internet cannot access the Router gt Forbid Ping Packet From LAN Port Enable or Disable Forbid Ping Packet From LAN Port The default setting is disabled If enabled the ping packet from LAN cannot access the Router This function can be used to defend against some viruses Click the Save button to save the settings Click the Blocked DoS Host List button to display the DoS host table by blocking 4 11 3 Local Management Choose menu Security Local Management you can configure the management rule in the screen as shown in Figure 4 51 The management feature allows you to deny computers in LAN from accessing the Router Local Management Management Rules Allthe PCs on the LAN are allowed to access the Router s Web Based Utility O Only the PCs listed can browse the built in web pages to perform Administrator tasks MAC 1 MAC 2 MAC 3 MAC 4 Your PC s MAC Address 6C 62 6D F 31 81 Add Figure 4 51 Local Management By default the radio button All the PCs on the LAN are allowed to access the Router s Web Based Utility is checked If you want to allow PCs with specific MAC Addresses to access the Setup page of the Router s Web Based Utility locally from inside the network check the radio button
232. n the LAN as Obtain an IP Address automatically 216 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT TEL 8 7 2 DHCP Client List Choose menu DHCP DHCP Client List and then you can view the information about the clients attached to the Router in the screen as shown in Figure 8 25 DHCP Client List ID Client Name MAC Address Assigned IP Lease Time 1 tplink14129 6C 62 6D F7 31 8D 192 168 0 100 01 15 47 2 Unknown 70 73 CB 1F C8 C9 192 168 0 101 01 56 32 Figure 8 25 DHCP Client List gt Client Name The name of the DHCP client gt MAC Address The MAC address of the DHCP client gt Assigned IP The IP address that the Router has allocated to the DHCP client gt Lease Time The time of the DHCP client leased After the dynamic IP address has expired a new dynamic IP address will be automatically assigned to the user You cannot change any of the values on this page To update this page and to show the current attached devices click the Refresh button 8 7 3 Address Reservation Choose menu DHCP Address Reservation and then you can view and add a reserved address for clients via the next screen shown in Figure 8 26 When you specify a reserved IP address for a PC on the LAN that PC will always receive the same IP address each time when it accesses the DHCP server Reserved IP addresses should be assigned to the servers that require permanent IP settings Address Reservation ID MAC Address Res
233. nect immediately This mode also supports the Max Idle Time function as Connect on Demand mode The Internet connection can be disconnected automatically 201 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLEL after a specified inactivity period and re established when you attempt to access the Internet again Click the Connect button to connect immediately Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately Caution Sometimes the connection cannot be terminated although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background Click the Save button to save your settings If your ISP provides L2TP connection please select L2TP Russia L2TP option Then you should enter the following parameters Figure 8 10 WAN Connection Type L2TP Russia L2TP v User Name username Password s nmnns Disconnect Disconnected Dynamic IP Static IP Server IP AddressName IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 DNS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Internet IP Address 0 0 0 0 Internet DNS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MTU Size in bytes 1460 The default is 1460 do not change unless necessary Max Idle Time 15 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Connection Mode Connect on Demand Connect Automatically Connect Manually Save Figure 8 10 WAN L2TP Russia L2TP gt User Name Password Ente
234. net Connection O i Figure 2 2 Hardware Installation of the TL WR710N in AP Mode 6 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA A ETT LTL 1 Connect the LAN or LAN WAN port of TL WR710N to the wired network port with an Ethernet cable 2 Plug the power plug of TL WR710N in electrical wall socket 3 Power on the PC s and notebook s 2 3 3 Repeater Mode Repeat signal from an existing wireless network This mode is suitable to extend wireless coverage reaching devices that were previously too far from your primary router to maintain a stable wireless connection The repeated signal will display the same network name and password as your existing wireless network SSID abc SSID abe kes Figure 2 3 Hardware Installation of the TL WR710N in Repeater Mode 1 Plug the power plug of TL WR710N in electrical wall socket 2 Power on the notebook s E Note It is recommended that you connect a PC notebook to the LAN port of the Router with an Ethernet cable and then login the Router from the PC notebook to set the Router in Repeater mode 2 3 4 Client Mode In this mode this device can be connected to another device via Ethernet cable and act as an adapter to grant your wired devices access to a wireless network especially for a Smart TV Media Player or Game console only with an Ethernet port SSID abc Figure 2 4 Hardware Installation of the TL WR710N in Client Mode 1 Connect the PC to the LAN or LAN WAN port of
235. nfiguring the Wireless MAC Filtering function as shown in Figure 5 14 Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless MAC Filtering Enabled Filtering Rules Deny the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access O Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access 1D MAC Address Status Description Modify Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 5 14 Wireless MAC Filtering To filter wireless users by MAC Address click Enabled The default setting is Disabled gt MAC Address The wireless station s MAC address that you want to access gt Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled gt Description A simple description of the wireless station To Add a Wireless MAC Address filtering entry click the Add New button The Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry page will appear shown in Figure 5 15 Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry MAC Address Description Status Enabled he Figure 5 15 Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry 118 TL WR710N MUI LTS MI TINA A ETT TS To add or modify a MAC Address Filtering entry follow these instructions 1 Enter the appropriate MAC Address into the MAC Address field The format of the MAC Address is XX XX XX XX XX XX X is any hexadecimal digit For example 00 0A EB BO 00 0B 2 Give a simple description for the wirel
236. ng measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment Such modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment This device and its antenna must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements this grant is applicable to only Mobile Configurations The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co located o
237. nt and Wireless Client Router Please select one you want Click Save to save your choice which is shown as Figure 5 7 Working Mode O Wireless Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection via ADSUCable Modem Access Point Transform your existing wired network to a wireless network Repeater Extend your existing wireless coverage by relaying wireless signal Client Acting as a Wireless Adapter to connect your wired devices e g XbowPS3 to a wireless network WISP Client Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP Figure 5 7 Wireless Working Mode Settings gt Wireless Router The wireless Router Mode In this mode the device enables multi user to share Internet via DSL Cable Modem The only wired port works as WAN gt Access Point The wireless access point mode gt Repeater The wireless Repeater Mode It could extend the range of wireless network gt Client The Client Mode The computer connected by Ethernet could get access to an AP by Client mode gt WISP Client Router In this mode the device enables multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP 5 6 Network Figure 5 8 the Network menu There is only one submenu under the Network menu shown in Figure 5 8 LAN 5 6 1 LAN Choose menu Network LAN and then you can configure the IP parameters of the LAN on the screen as below 112 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA
238. ntained in this partition will all be shared Folder Location Displays the location of this folder Select Check the radio button to select the folder to share Folder Displays folders that are in current path Upper Click this button to get into the upper folder Save Click this button to save your settings and the page will be redirected to the media server configuration page Back Click this button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page Click the Scan All button to scan all the share folders immediately You can also select the Auto scan at same time select an auto scan interval time by drop down list In this case the media server will auto scan the share folders ct Note The max share folders number is 6 If you want share a new folder when the number has been reached to be 6 you can delete a share folder and then add a new one 129 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT LTL 5 9 3 User Accounts You can specify the user name and password for Storage Sharing users on this page Storage Sharing users can use Internet Explorer to access files on the USB drive There are two default user accounts that can access the Storage Sharing They are Administrator and Guest as shown in Figure 5 31 Administrator has read write access to Storage Sharing and can access FTP Server while Guest has read only access to Storage Sharing and cannot access FTP Server User Account Manag
239. nu on the left of your browser and click the Virtual Servers submenu On the Virtual Servers page click Add New then on the Add or Modify a Virtual Server page enter 88 into the blank next to the Service Port and your IP address next to the IP Address assuming 192 168 0 188 for an example remember to Enable and Save Virtual Servers ID Service Port Internal Port IP Address Protocol Status Modify 1 88 88 192 168 0 188 All Enabled Modify Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure A 8 Virtual Servers 267 Service Port Internal Port IP Address Protocol Status Common Service Port TL WR710N MUI TS TINA AN ETT TLEL Add or Modify a Virtual Server Entry XK XX or XX GX Only valid for single Service Port or leave it blank All Enabled v v Select One s Figure A 9 Add or Modify a Virtual server Entry The wireless stations cannot connect to the Router 1 Make sure the Enable Wireless Router Radio is checked 2 Make sure that the wireless stations SSID accord with the Router s SSID 3 Make sure the wireless stations have right KEY for encryption when the Router is encrypted 4 Ifthe wireless connection is ready but you can t access the Router check the IP Address of your wireless stations 268 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT TLL Appendix B
240. o connectivity Figure B 0 2 5 The following TCP IP Properties window will display and the IP Address tab is open on this window by default 270 6 Select Obtain an IP address automatically Choose Obtain DNS server automatically as shown in the Figure below Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Te a 7 General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Use the following IP address L Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses L Figure B 0 3 Note For Windows 98 OS or before the PC and Router may need to be restarted 7 Click OK to keep your settings 271 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETA ILa LTAL Appendix C Specifications General Standards IEEE 802 11n 802 11b 802 11g Protocols TCP IP PPPoE DHCP ICMP NAT SNTP Port One 10 100Mbps LAN WAN port One 10 100Mbps LAN port 10BASE T UTP category 3 4 5 cable maximum 100m EIA TIA 568 1000 STP maximum 100m Cabling Type 100BASE TX UTP category 5 5e cable maximum 100m EIA TIA 568 1000 STP maximum 100m LED SYS Dimensions LxWxH 85mm x 75mm x 28mm Safety amp Emissions FCC CE Wireless Frequency Band 2 4 2 4835GHz Radio Data Rate
241. on If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number in minutes that you wish to have the Internet connecting last unless a new link is requested Caution Sometimes the connection cannot be disconnected although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background Click the Save button to save your settings 8 5 2 MAC Clone Choose menu Network MAC Clone and then you can configure the WAN MAC address on the screen below as shown in Figure 8 12 WAN MAC Address 00 1 D OF 01 06 29 L Restore Factory MAC Your PC s MAC Address 6C 62 6D F7 31 8D Clone MAC Address Figure 8 12 MAC Address Clone Some ISPs require that you register the MAC Address of your adapter Changes are rarely needed here gt WAN MAC Address This field displays the current MAC address of the WAN port If your ISP requires you to register the MAC address please enter the correct MAC address into this field in XX XX XX XX XX XX format X is any hexadecimal digit gt Your PC s MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the PC that is managing the Router If the MAC address is required you can click the Clone MAC Address To button and this MAC address will fill in the WAN MAC Address field 205 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLEL Click Restore Fact
242. on immediately Enable UDP FLOOD Filtering Enable or Disable the UDP FLOOD Filtering UDP FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 The default value is 500 Enter a value between 5 3600 When the current UPD FLOOD Packets number is beyond the set value the Router will startup the blocking function immediately 232 TL WR710N MUI tele TINA AN ETT TLL gt Enable TCP SYN FLOOD Attack Filtering Enable or Disable the TCP SYN FLOOD Attack Filtering gt TCP SYN FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 The default value is 50 Enter a value between 5 3600 When the current TCP SYN FLOOD Packets numbers is beyond the set value the Router will startup the blocking function immediately gt Ignore Ping Packet From WAN Port Enable or Disable Ignore Ping Packet From WAN Port The default setting is disabled If enabled the ping packet from the Internet cannot access the Router gt Forbid Ping Packet From LAN Port Enable or Disable Forbid Ping Packet From LAN Port The default setting is disabled If enabled the ping packet from LAN cannot access the Router This function can be used to defend against some viruses Click the Save button to save the settings Click the Blocked DoS Host List button to display the DoS host table by blocking 8 10 3 Local Management Choose menu Security Local Management you can configure the management rule in the screen as shown in Figure 8 47 The management feature allows you to deny co
243. on on the Wireless page as shown in Figure 6 7 and then AP List page will appear as shown in Figure 6 8 Find the SSID of the Access Point you want to access and click Connect in the corresponding row For example the third item is selected The target network s SSID will be automatically filled into the corresponding box which is shown as the Figure 6 7 AP List AP Count 16 COCOS CS CTI GETTING CT pereira Y ps e pone mes MT ATA 0 A TED 4 4c 60 DE 32 63 8 P LINK_18F710 3048 PA2 PSK B 14 E6 E4 E3 87 64 P LINK_TEST 1 6dB 6 o PA2 PSK Back Refresh gt Figure 6 8 AP List Be sure to click the Save button to save your settings on this page EP Note 1 The operating distance or range of your wireless connection varies significantly based on the physical placement of the Router For best results place your Router 143 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL e Near the center of the area in which your wireless stations will operate e In an elevated location such as a high shelf e Away from the potential sources of interference such as PCs microwaves and cordless phones e Away from large metal surfaces 2 Failure to follow these guidelines can result in significant performance degradation or inability to wirelessly connect to the Router 6 6 2 Wireless Security Choose menu Wireless Wireless Security and then you can configure the security settings of your wireless network
244. oot after the upgrading has been finished 162 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL 6 9 3 Factory Defaults Choose menu System Tools Factory Defaults and you can restore the configurations of the Router to factory defaults on the following screen Factory Defaults Click the following button to reset all configuration settings to their default values Figure 6 34 Restore Factory Default Click the Restore button to reset all configuration settings to their default values gt The default User Name admin gt The default Password admin gt The default IP Address 192 168 0 254 gt The default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 c Note All changed settings will be lost when defaults are restored 6 9 4 Backup amp Restore Choose menu System Tools Backup Restore and then you can save the current configuration of the Router as a backup file and restore the configuration via a backup file as shown in Figure 6 35 Backup amp Restore Configuration Backup Configuration File Figure 6 35 Backup 8 Restore Configuration gt Click the Backup button to save all configuration settings as a backup file in your local computer gt To upgrade the Router s configuration follow these instructions e Click the Browse button to locate the update file for the Router or enter the exact path to the Setting file in the text box e Click the Restore button 163 TL WR7
245. or a range of service ports in XXX YYY format XXX is the start port number YYY is the end port number Internal Port The Internal Service Port number of the PC running the service application You can leave it blank if the Internal Port is the same as the Service Port or enter a specific port number when Service Port is a single one IP Address The IP Address of the PC providing the service application Protocol The protocol used for this application either TCP UDP or All all protocols supported by the Router Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To setup a virtual server entry 1 2 oa FF Q Click the Add New button the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 8 38 Select the service port you want to use from the Common Service Port list If the Common Service Port list does not have the service that you want to use type the service port number or service port range in the Service Port box Type the IP Address of the computer in the IP Address box Select the protocol used for this application either TCP UDP or All Select the Enable to enable the virtual server Click the Save button 225 TL WR710N SAna eC T A MCL TITS Add or Modify a Virtual Server Entry Service Port CXK XX or XK Internal Port i Xx Only valid for single Service Port or leave it blank IP Address Protocol All v St
246. ord It is strongly recommended that you should change the factory default user name and password of the Router because all users who try to access the Router s Web based utility or Quick Setup will be prompted for the Router s default user name and password E Note The new user name and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and not include any spaces Enter the new Password twice to confirm Click the Save button when finished Click the Clear All button to clear all 165 TL WR710N MUI LTS NI TIN AR AN ETT LTL 6 9 7 System Log Choose menu System Tools System Log and then you can view the logs of the Router System Log Auto Mail Feature Disabled Mail Settings Log Type ALL xj Log Level ALL v Index Time Type Level Log Content 171 1st day 02 57 44 DHCP INFO DHCPC DHCP Serice unavailable recv no OFFER 170 1st day 02 57 42 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag 1 169 1st day 02 57 40 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with requestip 0 and unicast flag 1 168 1st day 02 57 36 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag 0 167 1st day 02 57 34 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag 0 166 1st day 02 57 32 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag O Time 2013 01 01 3 07 43 11264s H Ver WR710N v2 00000000 S Ver 3 15 11 Build 131125 Rel 50653n L 192 168 0 254 M 255 255 2
247. ormat and IP address in dotted decimal notation of the computer for which you want to reserve an IP address Click the Save button Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry MAC Address Reserved IP Address Status Enabled Y Figure 6 20 Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 2 3 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete Modify the information Click the Save button Click the Enable Disable All button to make all entries enabled disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page and Click the Previous button to return the previous page 153 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL 6 8 USB Settings USB Settings Media Server User Accounts Figure 6 21 The USB Settings menu There are three submenus under the USB Settings menu shown in Figure 6 21 Storage Sharing Media Server and User Accounts Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions 6 8 1 Storage Sharing Choose menu USB Settings Storage Sharing you can configure a USB disk drive attached to the router and view volume and share such properties as share name capacity used space and free space on this page as shown below Storage Sharing Service Status Started O Access shared storage with
248. ory MAC to restore the MAC address of WAN port to the factory default value Click the Save button to save your settings cf Note 1 Only the PC on your LAN can use the MAC Address Clone function 2 If you change WAN MAC Address when the WAN connection is PPPoE it will not take effect until the connection is re established 8 5 3 LAN Choose menu Network LAN and then you can configure the IP parameters of the LAN on the screen as below LAN MAC Address 00 1D OF 01 06 28 IP Address 192 168 0 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Y IGMP Proxy Enable Y Note IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol works for IPTY multicast stream The device supports both IGMP proxy with enabled or disable option and IGMP snooping Figure 8 13 LAN gt MAC Address The physical address of the LAN ports as seen from the LAN The value can t be changed gt IP Address Enter the IP address of your Router in dotted decimal notation factory default 192 168 0 254 gt Subnet Mask An address code that determines the size of the network Normally use 255 255 255 0 as the subnet mask gt IGMP Proxy The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP feature allows your devices in LAN can watch TV c Note 1 If you change the IP Address of LAN you must use the new IP Address to login to the Router 2 If the new LAN IP Address you set is not in the same subnet with the previous one the IP Address pool in the DHC
249. ou set the Mode to 11bgn mixed and all of 802 11b g n wireless stations can connect to the Router cf Note If 11bg mixed mode is selected in the Mode field the Channel Width selecting field will turn grey and the value will become 20M which is unable to be changed gt Channel Width Select any channel width from the pull down list The default setting is automatic which can automatically adjust the channel width for your clients gt Channel This field determines which operating frequency will be used The default channel is set to Auto lt is not necessary to change the wireless channel unless you notice interference problems with another nearby access point gt Enable Wireless Router Radio The wireless radio of the Router can be enabled or disabled to allow wireless stations access If enabled the wireless stations will be able to access the Router Otherwise wireless stations will not be able to access the Router gt Enable SSID Broadcast If you select the Enable SSID Broadcast checkbox the wireless router will broadcast its name SSID on the air Be sure to click the Save button to save your settings on this page E Note 1 The operating distance or range of your wireless connection varies significantly based on the physical placement of the Router For best results place your Router e Near the center of the area in which your wireless stations will operate e In an elevated location such as a high shelf
250. ower on during the entire process Loss of power during the upgrade could damage the Router 4 18 4 Factory Defaults This page allows you to restore the factory default settings for the router Factory Defaults Click the following button to reset all configuration settings to their default values Figure 4 92 Restore Factory Default Click the Restore button to reset all configuration settings to their default values gt The default User Name admin gt The default Password admin gt The default access tplinklogin net E Note Any settings you have saved will be lost when the default settings are restored 100 TL WR710N MUI eT AA ETA TT 4 18 5 Backup 8 Restore This page allows you to save current configuration of router as backup or restore the configuration file you saved before Backup 8 Restore Configuration Backup Backup Configuration Fe Figure 4 93 Backup amp Restore Configuration gt Click the Backup button to save all configuration settings as a backup file in your local computer gt To restore the router s configuration follow these instructions e Click the Browse button to select the backup file which you want to restore e Click the Restore button Note The current configuration will be covered with the uploading configuration file The restoration process lasts for 20 seconds and the router will restart automatically Keep the router on during the
251. p Time The length of the time since the Router was last powered on or reset Click the Refresh button to get the latest status and settings of the Router 31 TL WR710N MUI tele TN A AN ETA CIL LTL 4 3 Quick Setup Please refer to Section 3 2 Quick Installation Guide 4 4 WPS WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup can help you to quickly and securely connect to a network This section will guide you to add a new wireless device to an existing network quickly by function The WPS function is only available when the Operation Mode is set to Access Point Select menu WPS you will see the next screen shown in Figure 4 3 WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup WPSStatus Enabled Disable WPS Current PIN 12345670 Restore PIN Gen New PIN C Disable PIN ofthis Device Add A New Device Add Device Figure 4 3 WPS gt WPS Status To enable or disable the WPS function here gt Current PIN The current value of the device s PIN is displayed here The default PIN of the device can be found in the label or User Guide gt Restore PIN Restore the PIN of the device to its default gt Gen New PIN Click this button and then you can get a new random value for the device s PIN You can ensure the network security by generating a new PIN gt Disable PIN of this Device WPS external registrar of entering the device s PIN can be disabled or enabled manually If the device receives multiple failed attempts to authenticate
252. p your router as a file server 1 A N Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router Click the Rescan button to find the USB drive that has been attached to the router Click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service Click the Enable button under Shared to enable the disk to share Click the Open the disk to visit the sharing disk Note The router can automatically locate new USB drive But to display the information about your USB device you need to click the Rescan button manually The new settings will not take effect until you restart the service To unplug the USB drive click Eject Disk button first Simply pulling USB drive out of the USB port can cause damage to the device and loss of data Mounted volumes of each USB port are subject to the 8 volume limit So you cannot access more than 8 volumes on the USB storage device If you change the storage settings during the storage connection is established then the changes will not take effect until the router or the client is rebooted 180 TL WR710N MUI totes T A AN ETA IL TLL 7 8 2 Media Server Choose menu USB Settings Media Server you can create media server that allows you to share stored content with other computers and devices on your home network and on the Internet Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder
253. password Volume Capacity Used Free Use Shared volume 1 96B 1 36B 626 MB 67 Eject Disk Rescan Figure 6 22 Storage Sharing gt Service Status Indicates the Network Sharing service s current status You can click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service and click the Stop button to stop it gt Volume The volume name of the USB drive the users have access to Volume 1 8 is mapping to USB port1 and Volume 9 16 is mapping to USB port2 gt Capacity The storage capacity of the USB driver gt Used The used space of the USB driver gt Free The available space of the USB driver gt Use The percentage of the used space 154 gt TL WR710N MUI totes T A AN ETA TT Shared Indicates the shared or non shared status of the volume When the volume is shared you can click the Disable to stop sharing the volume when volume is non shared you can click the Enable button to share the volume Click the Start button to start the Network Sharing service Click the Stop button to stop the Network Sharing service Click the Eject Disk button to safely remove the USB storage device that is connected to USB port This takes the drive offline A message as shown in Figure 6 23 will appear on your web browser when it is safe to detach the USB disk Message from webpage O This operation will disable Media Server Are you sure to continue Figure 6 23 Safe Unplug Message
254. password for the Radius server e Group Key Update Period Specify the group key update interval in seconds The value should be 30 or above Enter 0 to disable the update WEP It is based on the IEEE 802 11 standard e Type you can choose the type for the WEP security on the pull down list The default setting is Automatic which can select Shared Key or Open System authentication type automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e WEP Key Format Hexadecimal and ASCII formats are provided here Hexadecimal format stands for any combination of hexadecimal digits 0 9 a f A F in the specified 145 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL length ASCII format stands for any combination of keyboard characters in the specified length WEP Key Password Select which of the four keys will be used and enter the matching WEP key that you create Make sure these values are identical on all wireless stations in your network Key Type You can select the WEP key length 64 bit or 128 bit or 152 bit for encryption Disabled means this WEP key entry is invalid 64 bit You can enter 10 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 5 ASCII characters 128 bit You can enter 26 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 13 ASCII characters 152 bit You can enter 32 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F
255. pgrade and then you can update the latest version of firmware for the Router on the following screen Firmware Upgrade File Browse Firmware Version 3 15 11 Build 131125 Rel 50653n Hardware Version WR710N v2 00000000 Figure 7 28 Firmware Upgrade gt Firmware Version This displays the current firmware version gt Hardware Version This displays the current hardware version The hardware version of the upgrade file must accord with the Router s current hardware version To upgrade the Router s firmware follow these instructions below 1 Download a more recent firmware upgrade file from the TP LINK website http www tp link com Type the path and file name of the update file into the File field or click the Browse button to locate the update file Click the Upgrade button Note New firmware versions are posted at http www tp link com and can be downloaded for free There is no need to upgrade the firmware unless the new firmware has a new feature you want to use However when experiencing problems caused by the Router rather than the configuration you can try to upgrade the firmware When you upgrade the Router s firmware you may lose its current configurations so before upgrading the firmware please write down some of your customized settings to avoid losing important settings Do not turn off the Router or press the Reset button while the firmware is being upgraded
256. ple TEST is NOT the same as fest gt Region Select your region from the pull down list This field specifies the region where the wireless function of the Router can be used It may be illegal to use the wireless function of the Router in a region other than one of those specified in this field If your 17 TL WR710N MUI tele TN A AN ETA IL LTL country or region is not listed please contact your local government agency for assistance gt Disable Security The wireless security function can be enabled or disabled If disabled the wireless stations will be able to connect the Router without encryption It is recommended strongly that you choose one of following options to enable security gt WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Select WPA based on pre shared passphrase e PSK Password You can enter ASCII or Hexadecimal characters For ASCII the key can be made up of any numbers 0 to 9 and any letters A to Z the length should be between 8 and 63 characters For Hexadecimal the key can be made up of any numbers 0 to 9 and letters A to F the length should be between 8 and 64 characters Please also note the key is case sensitive this means that upper and lower case keys will affect the outcome It would also be a good idea to write down the key and all related wireless security settings gt No Change If you chose this option wireless security configuration will not change gt More Advanced Wireless Settings Select to conf
257. plicate the registered MAC address of your first computer In most ofthe cases there is no need to clone the MAC address Butifyou cant getthe Internet connection after Quick Setup please run it again and clone the MAC address for a try No Ido not need to clone MAC address O Yes need to clone MAC address Note please make sure your current computer is the one initially connected to your modem or ISP s device Figure 3 7 Quick Setup MAC Clone If the connection type detected is PPPoE Russia PPPoE the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 3 8 Quick Setup PPPoE Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt WAN Connection Type gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish User Name Password Confirm Password Figure 3 8 Quick Setup PPPoE gt User Name Password Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP These fields are case sensitive If you have difficulty with this process please contact your ISP gt Confirm Password Re enter the password provided by your ISP to ensure the Password you entered is correct If the Password is different from the Confirm Password the screen will appear as shown below Click OK and re enter the Password and Confirm Password Microsoft Internet Explorer A The Password is different from the Confirm Password 15 TL WR710N MUI kote TA MCL elena TLEL If you select Static IP manually the next screen will appear
258. port Wireless Router Access Point Repeater Client WISP Client Router modes USB port supports charging for smart phone and tablet USB port supports storage sharing media server function Vv Vv VV WV WV Pre encryption prevents unauthorized access from users outside of the network 1 4 Panel Layout Figure 1 1 TL WR710N sketch TL WR710N MUI LTS II TINA AN ETT TS gt LED Status Indication Solid Green The device is working properly Condition 1 System is booting Blinking Condition 2 The Ethernet Cable or USB Device is connecting to the product Table 1 1 The LED Description gt USB It is used to connect USB Flash or Hard Disk for yle sharing and Mobile devices for charging gt Reset It is used to reset the Router to its factory defaults With the Router powered on use a pin to press and hold the Reset button about 5 seconds until the SYS LED becomes quick flash from slow flash And then release the button and wait the Router to reboot to its factory default settings gt LAN WAN This LAN WAN port works as LAN in AP Repeater Client WISP Client Router mode and as WAN in Wireless Router mode As LAN it connects the Router to the local PC as WAN it enables you connect the DSL cable Modem or Ethernet gt LAN This LAN port works as LAN in Wireless Router AP Repeater Client WISP Client Router mode It connects the Router to the local PC TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT TS
259. provided by your ISP 197 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA A ETT TS gt MTU Size The normal MTU Maximum Transmission Unit value for most Ethernet networks is 1500 Bytes It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP gt Primary Secondary DNS Optional Enter one or two DNS addresses in dotted decimal notation provided by your ISP Click the Save button to save your settings If your ISP provides a PPPoE connection select PPPoE Russia PPPoE option Then you should enter the following parameters Figure 8 7 WAN Connection Type PPPoE Russia PPPoE v PPPoE Connection User Name username Password s s m Confirm Password A Secondary Connection Disabled DynamicIP Static IP For Dual Access Russia PPPoE Wan Connection Mode Connect on Demand Max Idle Time 1s minutes 0 means remain active at all times Connect Automatically Time based Connecting Period of Time from p 0 HH MM to 3 log HH MM Connect Manually Maxldle Time 15 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Disconnect Disconnected Save Advanced Figure 8 7 WAN PPPoE Russia PPPoE gt User Name Password Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP These fields are case sensitive gt Confirm Password Enter again the Password provided by your ISP to ensure the password you entered is correct
260. pter Changes are rarely needed here gt WAN MAC Address This field displays the current MAC address of the WAN port If your ISP requires you to register the MAC address please enter the correct MAC address into this field in XX XX XX XX XX XX format X is any hexadecimal digit gt Your PC s MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the PC that is managing the Router If the MAC address is required you can click the Clone MAC Address To button and this MAC address will fill in the WAN MAC Address field Click Restore Factory MAC to restore the MAC address of WAN port to the factory default value 46 TL WR710N MUI kote T A ETA TITS Click the Save button to save your settings cf Note 1 Only the PC on your LAN can use the MAC Address Clone function 2 If you change WAN MAC Address when the WAN connection is PPPoE it will not take effect until the connection is re established 4 6 3 LAN Choose menu Network LAN and then you can configure the IP parameters of the LAN on the screen as below LAN MAC Address D0 1D 0F 01 06 28 IP Address 192 168 0 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 v IGMP Proxy Enable v Note IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol works for IPTY multicast stream The device supports both IGMP proxy with enabled or disable option and IGMP snooping Figure 4 17 LAN gt MAC Address The physical address of the LAN ports as seen from the LAN
261. r as shown in Figure 4 38 Add New Folder Display Name video Partition C Share entire partition Folder Location imy share Select Folder Jpper O photo video Figure 4 38 Add New Folder gt Display Name You can enter a display name for the share folder gt Share entire partition Choose this option and then the folders contained in this partition will all be shared gt Folder Location Displays the location of this folder gt Select Check the radio button to select the folder to share gt Folder Displays folders that are in current path gt Upper Click this button to get into the upper folder gt Save Click this button to save your settings and the page will be redirected to the media server configuration page gt Back Click this button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page 4 Click the Scan All button to scan all the share folders immediately You can also select the Auto scan at same time select an auto scan interval time by drop down list In this case the media server will auto scan the share folders ct Note The max share folders number is 6 If you want share a new folder when the number has been reached to be 6 you can delete a share folder and then add a new one 4 9 3 User Accounts You can specify the user name and password for Storage Sharing users on this page Storage Sharing users can use Internet Explorer to access
262. r operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter CE Mark Warning C 1588 This is a class B product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Canadian Compliance Statement This device complies with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 This device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Cet appareil est conforme aux norms CNR exemptes de licence d Industrie Canada Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes 1 cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d interf rences et 2 cet appareil doit accepter toute interference y compris celles susceptibles de provoquer un fonctionnement non souhait de l appareil Industry Canada Statement Complies with the Canadian ICES 003 Class B specifications Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada This Class B device meets all the requirements of the Canadian interference causing equipment regulations Cet appareil num rique de la Classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada Korea Warning Statements qa RAMS SRS AREA 1540 YS
263. r router s LAN IP address If the LAN IP of the modem connected with your router is 192 168 1 x the default LAN IP of the router will automatically switch from 192 168 0 254 to 192 168 1 254 to avoid IP conflict in this case please try net use 192 168 1 254 delete yes 8 9 Forwarding Forwarding Port Triggering DMZ UPnP Figure 8 37 The Forwarding menu There are four submenus under the Forwarding menu shown in Figure 8 37 Virtual Servers Port Triggering DMZ and UPnP Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 8 9 1 Virtual Servers Choose menu Forwarding Virtual Servers and then you can view and add virtual servers in the screen as shown in Figure 8 38 Virtual servers can be used for setting up public services on your LAN such as DNS Email and FTP A virtual server is defined as a service port and all requests from the Internet to this service port will be redirected to the computer specified by the server IP Any PC that was used for a virtual server must have a static or reserved IP Address because its IP Address may be changed when using the DHCP function 224 TL WR710N MUI tele T A A ETA TIT Virtual Servers ID Service Port Internal Port IP Address Protocol Status Modify Add New Enable Al Disable All Delete A Previous Next Figure 8 38 Virtual Servers Service Port The numbers of External Ports You can type a service port
264. r the ISP s IP address or the domain name If you choose static IP and enter the domain name you should also enter the DNS assigned by your ISP And click the Save button Click the Connect button to connect immediately Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately gt Connect on Demand You can configure the Router to disconnect from your Internet connection after a specified period of inactivity Max Idle Time If your Internet connection has been terminated due to inactivity Connect on Demand enables the Router to automatically re establish your connection as soon as you attempt to access 204 TL WR710N MUI kote T A A ETA TT the Internet again If you wish to activate Connect on Demand check the radio button If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet connection terminates Connect Automatically Connect automatically after the Router is disconnected To use this option check the radio button Connect Manually You can configure the Router to make it connect or disconnect manually After a specified period of inactivity Max Idle Time the Router will disconnect from your Internet connection and you will not be able to re establish your connection automatically as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again To use this option click the radio butt
265. r the User Name and Password provided by your ISP These fields are case sensitive gt Dynamic IP Static IP Choose either as you are given by your ISP Click the Connect button to connect immediately Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately 202 TL WR710N MUI LTS MI TINA A ETT TLL gt Connect on Demand You can configure the Router to disconnect from your Internet connection after a specified period of inactivity Max Idle Time If your Internet connection has been terminated due to inactivity Connect on Demand enables the Router to automatically re establish your connection as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again If you wish to activate Connect on Demand check the radio button If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet connection terminates gt Connect Automatically Connect automatically after the Router is disconnected To use this option check the radio button gt Connect Manually You can configure the Router to make it connect or disconnect manually After a specified period of inactivity Max Idle Time the Router will disconnect from your Internet connection and you will not be able to re establish your connection automatically as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again To use this option check the radio button If you want your
266. r you select is www comexe cn the page will appear as shown in Figure 8 81 Service Provider Domain Name Domain Name Domain Name Domain Name Domain Name User Name Password Comexe www comexe cn Y Goto register username Connection Status C Enable DDNS DDNS not launching Figure 8 81 Comexe cn DDNS Settings To set up for DDNS follow these instructions 1 Type the Domain Name received from your dynamic DNS service provider 2 Type the User Name for your DDNS account 3 Type the Password for your DDNS account 4 Click the Login button to log in to the DDNS service Connection Status The status of the DDNS service connection is displayed here Click Logout to log out of the DDNS service 254 8 16 3 Dyndns org DDNS TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT TLL If the dynamic DNS Service Provider you select is www dyndns org the page will appear as shown in Figure 8 82 Service Provider User Name Password Domain Name Connection Status Dyndns www dyndns org v Goto register username C Enable DONS DDNS not launching Login Logout Save Figure 8 82 Dyndns org DDNS Settings To set up for DDNS follow these instructions A N Type the User Name for your DDNS account Type the Password for your DDNS account Type the Domain Name you received from
267. racters in length gt Password Enter the password in the Password field The password must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length For security purposes the password for each user account is not displayed gt Storage Authority Choose Read and Write or Read Only from the drop down list to assign access authority of Storage Sharing to the user gt Save You can click the Save button to save your settings gt Back You can click the Back button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page cf Note Please restart the service for the new settings to take effect If you cannot use the new user name and password to access the shares press Windows logo R to open the Run dialog box and type net use 192 168 0 254 delete yes and press Enter 192 168 0 254 is your router s LAN IP address If the LAN IP of the modem connected with your router is 192 168 1 x the default LAN IP of the router will automatically switch from 192 168 0 254 to 192 168 1 254 to avoid IP conflict in this case please try net use 192 168 1 254 delete yes 159 TL WR710N MUNTANER AN ETT TLEL 6 9 System Tools System Tools Firmware Upgrade Factory Defaults Backup amp Restore Reboot Password System Log Figure 6 30 The System Tools menu Choose menu System Tools and then you can see the submenus under the main menu Diagnostic
268. reen will then appear as shown in Figure 7 22 Display Name Partition Folder Location Select Add New Folder video C Share entire partition imy share Curent No 1 page Figure 7 22 Add New Folder gt Display Name You can enter a display name for the share folder gt Share entire partition Choose this option and then the folders contained in this partition will all be shared gt Folder Location Displays the location of this folder gt Select Check the radio button to select the folder to share gt Folder Displays folders that are in current path gt Upper Click this button to get into the upper folder gt Save Click this button to save your settings and the page will be redirected to the media server configuration page 182 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT TS gt Back Click this button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page 4 Click the Scan All button to scan all the share folders immediately You can also select the Auto scan at same time select an auto scan interval time by drop down list In this case the media server will auto scan the share folders ce Note The max share folders number is 6 If you want share a new folder when the number has been reached to be 6 you can delete a share folder and then add a new one 7 8 3 User Accounts You can specify the user name and password for
269. responding function The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below 4 16 1 Binding Setting This page displays the IP amp MAC Binding Setting table you can operate it in accord with your desire Binding Settings ARP Binding Disable Enable ID MAC Address IP Address Bind Modify 1 00 0A EB 00 07 BE 192 168 0 173 Modify Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Current No 1 Page Figure 4 80 IP amp MAC Binding Setting gt MAC Address The MAC address of the controlled computer in the LAN gt IP Address The assigned IP address of the controlled computer in the LAN gt Bind Whether or not enable the ARP binding gt Modify Edit or delete item 91 TL WR710N MUI LTS NI TINA AN ETT TLEL When you want to add or modify an IP MAC Binding entry you can click the Add New button or Modify button and then you will go to the next page This page is used for adding or modifying an IP 8 MAC Binding entry IP amp MAC Binding Settings Bind MAC Address IP Address Figure 4 81 IP amp MAC Binding Setting Add amp Modify To add IP amp MAC Binding entries 1 2 3 4 Click the Add New button Enter the MAC Address and IP Address Select the Bind checkbox Click the Save button to save it To modify or delete an existing entry 1 2 Find the desired entry in the table
270. ries c Note 1 When the trigger connection is released the corresponding opening ports will be closed 2 Each rule is allowed to be used only by one host on LAN synchronously The trigger connection of other hosts on LAN will be refused 3 Incoming Port Range cannot overlap each other 8 9 3 DMZ Choose menu Forwarding DMZ and then you can view and configure DMZ host in the screen as shown in Figure 8 42 The DMZ host feature allows one local host to be exposed to the Internet for a special purpose service such as Internet gaming or videoconferencing DMZ host forwards all the ports at the same time Any PC whose port is being forwarded must have its DHCP client function disabled and should have a new static IP Address assigned to it because its IP Address may be changed when using the DHCP function 228 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL DMZ Current DMZ Status Enable Disable DMZ Host IP Address 0 0 0 0 Figure 8 42 DMZ To assign a computer or server to be a DMZ server 1 Check the Enable radio button 2 Enter the IP Address of a local host in the DMZ Host IP Address field 3 Click the Save button E Note After you set the DMZ host the firewall related to the host will not work 8 9 4 UPnP Choose menu Forwarding UPnP and then you can view the information about UPnP Universal Plug and Play in the screen as shown in Figure 8 43 The UPnP feature allows the devic
271. rk Beacon Interval value determines the time interval of the beacons The default value is 100 RTS Threshold Here you can specify the RTS Request to Send Threshold If the packet is larger than the specified RTS Threshold size the Router will send RTS frames to a 213 TL WR710N MUI kote T N A MCL TT particular receiving station and negotiate the sending of a data frame The default value is 2346 gt Fragmentation Threshold This value is the maximum size determining whether packets will be fragmented Setting the Fragmentation Threshold too low may result in poor network performance because of excessive packets 2346 is the default setting and is recommended gt DTIM Interval This value determines the interval of the Delivery Traffic Indication Message DTIM A DTIM field is a countdown field informing clients of the next window for listening to broadcast and multicast messages When the Router has buffered broadcast or multicast messages for associated clients it sends the next DTIM with a DTIM Interval value You can specify the value between 1 255 Beacon Intervals The default value is 1 which indicates the DTIM Interval is the same as Beacon Interval gt Enable WMM WMM function can guarantee the packets with high priority messages being transmitted preferentially It is strongly recommended enabled gt Enable Short GI This function is recommended for it will increase the data capacity by reducin
272. rk menu shown in Figure 8 4 WAN MAC Clone and LAN Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 8 5 1 WAN Choose menu Network WAN and then you can configure the IP parameters of the WAN on the screen below 1 If your ISP provides the DHCP service please choose Dynamic IP type and the Router will automatically get IP parameters from your ISP You can see the page as follow Figure 8 5 WAN Connection Type Dynamic IP x IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Renew Release WAN port is unplugged MTU Size in bytes 1500 The defaultis 1500 do not change unless necessary O Use These DNS Servers Primary DNS 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 0 Optional Host Name TL VWVR710N O Get IP with Unicast DHCP lt is usually not required Figure 8 5 WAN Dynamic IP This page displays the WAN IP parameters assigned dynamically by your ISP including IP address Subnet Mask Default Gateway etc Click the Renew button to renew the IP parameters from your ISP Click the Release button to release the IP parameters 196 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS gt MTU Size The normal MTU Maximum Transmission Unit value for most Ethernet networks is 1500 Bytes It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP gt Use These DNS Servers If your ISP gives you
273. rname Password Auth Server sm server Auth Domain MTU Size in bytes 11500 The default is 1500 do not change unless necessary Connection Mode Connect on Demand Max Idle Time 15 minutes 0 means remain active at all times O Connect Automatically O Connect Manually Max Idle Time 15 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Disconnect Disconnected Figure 8 9 WAN BigPond Cable User Name Password Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP These fields are case sensitive Auth Server Enter the authenticating server IP address or host name Auth Domain Type in the domain suffix server name based on your location MTU Size The default MTU size is 1480 bytes which is usually fine It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP Connect on Demand In this mode the Internet connection can be terminated automatically after a specified inactivity period Max Idle Time and be re established when you attempt to access the Internet again If you want your Internet connection keeps active all the time please enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet access disconnects Connect Automatically The connection can be re established automatically when it was down Connect Manually You can click the Connect Disconnect button to connect discon
274. rom 18 00 to 20 00 on Saturday and Sunday and forbid other hosts in the LAN to access the Internet you should follow the settings below 1 Click Access Restriction Host in the left to enter the Host Settings page Add a new entry with the Host Description is Host_1 and MAC Address is 00 11 22 33 44 AA Click Access Restriction Target in the left to enter the Target Settings page Add a new entry with the Target Description is Target_1 and Domain Name is www google com Click Access Restriction Schedule in the left to enter the Schedule Settings page Add a new entry with the Schedule Description is Schedule _1 Day is Sat and Sun Start Time is 1800 and Stop Time is 2000 Click Access Restriction Rule in the left to return to the Access Restriction Rule Management page Select Enable Internet Access Restriction and choose Deny the packets not specified by any access Restriction policy to pass through the Router Click Add New button to add a new rule as follows 239 Then you will go back to the Access Restriction Rule Management page and see the following list TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL In Rule Name field create a name for the rule Note that this name should be unique for example Rule_1 In Host field select Host_1 In Target field select Target_1 In Schedule field select Schedule_1 In Action field select Allow In Status field select Enabled C
275. rs Note To use the DHCP server function of the Router you must configure all computers on the LAN as Obtain an IP Address automatically This function will take effect until this device reboots When you choose the Smart IP DHCP mode in Network gt LAN the DHCP Server function will be disabled You will see the page as below DHCP Settings DHCP Server Disable Enable Start IP Address 92 580100 End IP Address 92 168 0 199 Address Lease Time 20 minutes 1 2880 minutes the default value is 120 Default Gateway 1921680254 Optional Default Domain Optional Primary DNS i Optional Secondary DNS Optional in this situation the device will help you configure the DHCP automaticaly as you need Save Figure 7 12 DHCP Settings 176 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT TEL 7 7 2 DHCP Client List Choose menu DHCP DHCP Client List and then you can view the information about the clients attached to the Router in the screen as shown in Figure 7 13 DHCP Client List ID Client Name MAC Address Assigned IP Lease Time 1 tplink14129 6C 62 6D F7 31 8D 192 168 0 100 01 15 47 2 Unknown 70 73 CB 1F C8 C9 192 168 0 101 01 56 32 Figure 7 13 DHCP Clients List gt Client Name The name of the DHCP client gt MAC Address The MAC address of the DHCP client gt Assigned IP The IP address that the Router has allocated to the DHCP client gt Lease Time The time of
276. rvation and then you can view and add a reserved address for clients via the next screen shown in Figure 5 22 When you specify a reserved IP address for a PC on the LAN that PC will always receive the same IP address each time when it accesses the DHCP server Reserved IP addresses should be assigned to the servers that require permanent IP settings Address Reservation 1D MAC Address Reserved IP Address Status Modify 1 00 11 22 33 44 AA 192 168 0 169 Enabled Modify Delete Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 5 22 Address Reservation gt MAC Address The MAC address of the PC for which you want to reserve an IP address gt Reserved IP Address The IP address reserved for the PC by the Router gt Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled gt Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To Reserve an IP address 1 Click the Add New button Then Figure 5 23 will pop up 124 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL 2 Enter the MAC address in XX XX XX XX XX XX format and IP address in dotted decimal notation of the computer for which you want to reserve an IP address 3 Click the Save button Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry MAC Address Reserved IP Address Status Enabled Y Figure 5 23 Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the
277. s 1480 bytes which is usually fine It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP gt Service Name AC Name The service name and AC Access Concentrator name should not be configured unless you are sure it is necessary for your ISP In most cases leaving these fields blank will work gt ISP Specified IP Address If your ISP does not automatically assign IP addresses to the Router during login please click Use IP address specified by ISP check box and enter the IP address provided by your ISP in dotted decimal notation gt Detect Online Interval The Router will detect Access Concentrator online at every interval The default value is 0 You can input the value between 0 and 120 The value 0 means no detect gt Primary DNS Secondary DNS If your ISP does not automatically assign DNS addresses to the Router during login please click Use the following DNS servers check box and enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation of your ISP s primary DNS server If a secondary DNS server address is available enter it as well Click the Save button to save your settings If your ISP provides BigPond Cable connection please select BigPond Cable option Then you should enter the following parameters Figure 8 9 200 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL WAN Connection Type BigPond Cable Y User Name use
278. s drop down list Click the Save button to make the entry take effect Click the Delete button to delete the entry Click the Enable All button to enable all the entries Click the Disable All button to disable all the entries Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries Click the Previous button to view the information in the previous screen click the Next button to view the information in the next screen 8 13 2 System Routing Table Choose menu Advanced Routing System Routing Table and you can views all of the valid route entries in use The Destination IP address Subnet Mask Gateway and Interface will be displayed for each entry System Routing Table ID Destination Network Subnet Mask Gateway Interface 1 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 LAN amp WLAN 2 239 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LAN amp WLAN Figure 8 70 Routing Table Destination Network The Destination IP Address is the address of the network or host to which the static route is assigned Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask determines which portion of an IP address is the network portion and which portion is the host portion Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway device that allows for contact between the Router and the network or host Interface This interface tells you whether the Destination IP Address is on the LAN amp WLAN internal wired and wireless networks the WAN Internet Click the Refresh button to re
279. se refer to Section 3 2 Quick Installation Guide 8 4 Working Mode The Router supports five operation mode types Wireless Router Access Point Repeater Client and Wireless Client Router Please select one you want Click Save to save your choice which is shown as Figure 8 3 Working Mode Wireless Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection via ADSLCable Modem O Access Point Transform your existing wired network to a wireless network Repeater Extend your existing wireless coverage by relaying wireless signal Client Acting as a Wireless Adapter to connect your wired devices e g XbowPS3 to a wireless network WISP Client Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP Figure 8 3 Working Mode Wireless Router The wireless Router Mode In this mode the device enables multi user to share Internet via DSL Cable Modem The only wired port works as WAN Access Point The wireless access point mode Repeater The wireless Repeater Mode It could extend the range of wireless network Client The Client Mode The computer connected by Ethernet could get access to an AP by Client mode 195 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL gt WISP Client Router In this mode the device enables multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP 8 5 Network MAC Clone LAN Figure 8 4 The Network menu There are three submenus under the Netwo
280. server address have been provided by your ISP Otherwise please select Dynamic IP gt Server IP Address Name Enter server IP address or domain name provided by your ISP Then the Wireless page will appear as shown in Figure 3 12 Set the wireless parameters It is recommended that you rename an SSID choose a Security Type and enter a Password Then click Next Quick Setup Wireless Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt WAN Connection Type gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish Wireless Radio Enable Nj Wireless Network Name TP LINK_010630 Also called the SSID Region United Kingdom x Wireless Security O Disable Security WPA PSK WPA2 PSK PSK Password 05059041 You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters between 8 and 64 O No Change Use the current security settings O More Advanced Wireless Settings Figure 3 12 Quick Setup Wireless gt Wireless Radio Enable or disable the wireless radio choosing from the pull down list gt Wireless Network Name Enter a string of up to 32 characters The same name of SSID Service Set Identification must be assigned to all wireless devices in your network The default SSID is set to be TP LINK_XXXXXX XXXXXX indicates the last unique six numbers of each Router s MAC address But it is recommended strongly that you change your networks name SSID to a different value This value is case sensitive For exam
281. server entry 1 2 oa F Q Click the Add New button the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 4 43 Select the service port you want to use from the Common Service Port list If the Common Service Port list does not have the service that you want to use type the service port number or service port range in the Service Port box Type the IP Address of the computer in the IP Address box Select the protocol used for this application either TCP UDP or All Select the Enabled to enable the virtual server Click the Save button 66 TL WR710N SAna eC T A MCL TITS Add or Modify a Virtual Server Entry Service Port CXK XX or XK Internal Port i Xx Only valid for single Service Port or leave it blank IP Address Protocol All v Status Enabled he Common Service Port Select One v Figure 4 43 Add or Modify a Virtual Server Entry ce Note If your computer or server has more than one type of available service please select another service and enter the same IP Address for that computer or server To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable Disable All button to make all entries enabled disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Click the Next button to go to the next page and
282. sire to restrict the internet activities of host with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA in the LAN to access www google com only you should first follow the settings below 1 Click Add New button in Figure 4 64 to enter the Add or Modify an Access Target Entry page In Mode field select Domain Name from the drop down list In Target Description field create a unique description for the target e g Target_1 In Domain Name field enter www google com a F wo DN Click Save to complete the settings 84 TL WR710N MUI tote Clam T A MCL ol eda retells Then you will go back to the Target Settings page and see the following list ID Target Description Information Modify 1 Target_1 www google com Edit Delete Add New Delete All Previous Next Current No 1 Page Figure 4 67 Target Settings 4 13 4 Schedule Choose menu Access Control Schedule you can view and set a Schedule list in the next screen as shown in Figure 4 68 The Schedule list is necessary for the Access Restriction Rule Schedule Settings ID Schedule Description Day Time Modify Add New Delete All Prevoius Next Current No 1 v Page Figure 4 68 Schedule Settings gt Schedule Description Here displays the description of the schedule and this description is unique gt Day Here displays the day s in a week gt Time Here displays the time period in a day gt Modify Here you can edit or d
283. site Description Schedule Status Modify Add New Enable All Disable All Delete A Previous Next Current No 4 vi Page Figure 4 53 Parental Control Settings gt Parental Control Check Enable if you want this function to take effect otherwise check Disable gt MAC Address of Parental PC In this field enter the MAC address of the controlling PC or you can make use of the Copy To Above button below gt MAC Address of Your PC This field displays the MAC address of the PC that is managing this Router If the MAC Address of your adapter is registered you can click the Copy To Above button to fill this address to the MAC Address of Parental PC field above gt Website Description Description of the allowed website for the PC controlled gt Schedule The time period allowed for the PC controlled to access the Internet For detailed information please go to Access Control Schedule gt Modify Here you can edit or delete an existing entry To add a new entry please follow the steps below 1 Click the Add New button and the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 4 54 2 Enter the MAC address of the PC e g 00 11 22 33 44 AA you d like to control in the MAC Address of Child PC field Or you can choose the MAC address from the All Address in Current LAN drop down list 3 Give a description e g Allow Google for the website allowed to be accessed in the Website Description field 76
284. sly in areas with no wired ISP infrastructure Reliable Security Protections j With multiple protection measures including SSID broadcast control and wireless LAN 64 128 152 bit WEP encryption WiFi protected Access WPA2 PSK WPA PSK as well as advanced Firewall protections the TL WR710N WiFi Pocket Router AP TV Adapter Repeater provides complete data privacy Flexible Access Control The TL WR710N WiFi Pocket Router AP TV Adapter Repeater supports Virtual Server and DMZ host for Port Triggering and then the network administrators can manage and monitor the network in real time with the remote management function Since the Router is compatible with virtually all the major operating systems it is very easy to manage Quick Setup Wizard is supported and detailed instructions are provided step by step in oe TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL this user guide Before installing the Router please look through this guide to know all the Router s functions 1 2 Conventions The Router or TL WR710N mentioned in this guide stands for TL WR710N WiFi Pocket Router AP TV Adapter Repeater without any explanation Parameters provided in the pictures are just references for setting up the product which may differ from the actual situation You can set the parameters according to your demand 1 3 Main Features Portable design ideal for travel and home use Built in power supply design without external power adapter Sup
285. ss 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 DNS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Internet IP Address 0 0 0 0 Internet DNS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MTU Size in bytes 1420 The default is 1420 do not change unless necessary Max Idle Time 15 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Connection Mode Connect on Demand Connect Automatically O Connect Manually Save Figure 4 15 WAN PPTP Russia PPTP User Name Password Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP These fields are case sensitive Dynamic IP Static IP Choose either as you are given by your ISP and enter the ISP s IP address or the domain name If you choose static IP and enter the domain name you should also enter the DNS assigned by your ISP And click the Save button Click the Connect button to connect immediately Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately gt Connect on Demand You can configure the Router to disconnect from your Internet connection after a specified period of inactivity Max Idle Time If your Internet connection has been terminated due to inactivity Connect on Demand enables the Router to automatically re establish your connection as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again If you wish to activate Connect on Demand check the radio button If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times enter 0 in the Max 45 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LT
286. ss through the Router E Deny the packets specified by any enabled access control policy to pass through the Router Save ID Rule Name Host Target Schedule Status Modify setup Wizard Add New Enable All Disable All Delete All D mo Previous Next Current No 1 v Page Figure 8 53 Access Control Rule Management Enable Internet Access Restriction Select the check box to enable the Internet Access Restriction function so the Default Filter Policy can take effect Rule Name Here displays the name of the rule and this name is unique Host Here displays the host selected in the corresponding rule Target Here displays the target selected in the corresponding rule Schedule Here displays the schedule selected in the corresponding rule Action Here displays the action the Router takes to deal with the packets It could be Allow or Deny Allow means that the Router permits the packets to go through the Router Deny means that the Router rejects the packets to go through the Router Status This field displays the status of the rule Enabled means the rule will take effect Disabled means the rule will not take effect Modify Here you can edit or delete an existing rule To add a new rule please follow the steps below 1 2 3 4 Click the Add New button and the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 8 53 Give a name e g Rule_1 for the rule in the Rule Name field Select a host fro
287. st The default setting is Automatic which can select Shared Key or Open System authentication type automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e WEP Key Format Hexadecimal and ASCII formats are provided here Hexadecimal format stands for any combination of hexadecimal digits 0 9 a f A F in the specified length ASCII format stands for any combination of keyboard characters in the specified length WEP Key Password Select which of the four keys will be used and enter the matching WEP key that you create Make sure these values are identical on all wireless stations in your network e Key Type You can select the WEP key length 64 bit or 128 bit or 152 bit for encryption Disabled means this WEP key entry is invalid 210 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL 64 bit You can enter 10 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 5 ASCII characters 128 bit You can enter 26 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 13 ASCII characters 152 bit You can enter 32 hexadecimal digits any combination of 0 9 a f A F zero key is not promoted or 16 ASCII characters EP Note If you do not set the key the wireless security function is still disabled even if you have selected Shared Key as Authentication Type Be sure to click the Save button to save your settings on this page 8 6 3 Wireless MAC Filtering
288. st Name TLWWR710N O SetIP with Unicast DHCP lt is usually not required Figure 4 9 WAN Dynamic IP This page displays the WAN IP parameters assigned dynamically by your ISP including IP address Subnet Mask Default Gateway etc Click the Renew button to renew the IP parameters from your ISP Click the Release button to release the IP parameters 37a TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT TLEL gt MTU Size The normal MTU Maximum Transmission Unit value for most Ethernet networks is 1500 Bytes It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP gt Use These DNS Servers If your ISP gives you one or two DNS addresses select Use These DNS Servers and enter the primary and secondary addresses into the correct fields Otherwise the DNS servers will be assigned dynamically from your ISP Note If you find error when you go to a website after entering the DNS addresses it is likely that your DNS servers are set up improperly You should contact your ISP to get DNS server addresses gt Host Name This option specifies the Host Name of the Router gt Get IP with Unicast DHCP A few ISPs DHCP servers do not support the broadcast applications If you cannot get the IP Address normally you can choose this option It is rarely required Click the Save button to save your settings If your ISP provides a static or fixed IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gat
289. st from the page 137 TL WR710N MUI LTS MI TINA A e ETT TLL Chapter 6 Configuration for Repeater Mode This chapter will show each Web page s key functions and the configuration way for Repeater Mode of TL WR710N 6 1 Login After your successful login you can configure and manage the device There are main menus on the left of the web based utility Submenus will be available after you click one of the main menus On the right there are the corresponding explanations and instructions Status Quick Setup Working Mode Network Wireless DHCP USB Settings System Tools Figure 6 1 The detailed explanations for each Web page s key function are listed below 6 2 Status The Status page provides the current status information about the Router on Repeater Mode All information is read only 138 TL WR710N MINT TINA AN ETT TLEL Firmware Version 3 15 11 Build 131125 Rel 50653n Hardware Version WR710N v2 00000000 Wired MAC Address 00 1D 0F 01 06 30 IP Address 192 168 0 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Wireless Working Mode Repeater Wireless Name of Root AP Channel 1 Mode 11bgn mixed Channel Width Automatic MAC Address 00 1D 0F 01 06 30 Traffic Statistics Received Sent Bytes 0 15 960 Packets 0 56 System Up Time 0 days 00 02 37 Figure 6 2 Status Firmware Version The version information of the Router s firmware Hardware Version The version information of the
290. statistics e Received Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been received out from the WAN port e Received Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been received out from the WAN port Sent Bytes Traffic that counted in bytes has been sent out from the WAN port e Sent Packets Traffic that counted in packets has been sent out from the WAN port gt System Up Time The length of the time since the Router was last powered on or reset Click the Refresh button to get the latest status and settings of the Router 7 3 Quick Setup Please refer to Section 3 2 Quick Installation Guide 7 4 Working Mode The Router supports five operation mode types Wireless Router Access Point Repeater Client and Wireless Client Router Please select one you want Click Save to save your choice which is shown as Figure 7 3 Working Mode Wireless Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection via ADSL Cable Modem O Access Point Transform your existing wired network to a wireless network Repeater Extend your existing wireless coverage by relaying wireless signal Client Acting as a Wireless Adapter to connect your wired devices e g XbowPS3 to a wireless network WISP Client Router Enable multiple users to share Internet connection from WISP Figure 7 3 Working Mode gt Wireless Router The wireless Router Mode In this mode the device enables multi user to share Internet via D
291. t 16 COCOS COM STAN GETTING CI pereira Y ps e pone mes MIT framre s DN TED 4 4c 60 DE 32 63 8 P LINK_18F710 3008 PA2 PSK B 14 E6 E4 E3 87 64 P LINK_TEST 1648 6 o PA2 PSK Back Refresh Figure 3 19 AP List Note If you know the SSID of the desired AP you can also input it into the field SSID manually 3 Click the Next button in Figure 3 18 You will then see the Finish page Because something has changed on the Wireless Repeater page you will see the Finish page as shown in Figure 3 20 Click the Reboot button to make your wireless configuration take effect and finish the Quick Setup 22 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS Congratulations This device is now connecting you to the Internet For detail settings please click other menus if necessary The change of working mode config will not take effect until this device reboot Figure 3 20 Quick Setup Finish 3 2 4 Client Mode When you choose Client on Working Mode page in Figure 3 5 take the following steps 1 Click Next in Figure 3 5 and then Wireless Client page will appear as shown in Figure 3 21 Quick Setup Wireless Start gt gt Working Mode gt gt Wireless gt gt Finish Client Mode Setting Wireless Name of Root AP Jl also called SSID MAC Address of Root AP Region United Kingdom w WDS Mode Auto v Wireless Security Mode No Security E v Figure 3 21 Qui
292. t status information about the Router on WISP Client Router Mode All information is read only 192 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL Firmware Version Hardware Version LAN MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Wireless Working Mode Wireless Radio Name SSID Channel Mode Channel Width MAC Address Client Status WAN MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway DNS Server Traffic Statistics System Up Time Bytes Packets 3 15 11 Build 131125 Rel 50653n WR710N v2 00000000 00 1D 0F 01 06 30 192 168 0 254 255 255 255 0 WISP Client Router Enable TP LINK_010630 2 11bgn mixed Automatic 00 1D 0F 01 06 30 Init 00 1D 0F 01 06 31 0 0 0 0 Dynamic IP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WAN port is unplugged 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Received Sent 0 0 0 0 0 days 00 01 15 Figure 8 2 Status Firmware Version The version information of the Router s firmware Hardware Version The version information of the Router s hardware LAN This field displays the current settings or information for the LAN you can configure them in the Network gt LAN page e MAC Address The physical address of the Router as seen from the LAN e IP Address The LAN IP address of the Router 193 TL WR710N MUI LTS MI TINA AN ETT TLL Subnet Mask The subnet mask associated with LAN IP address Wireless This field displays basic information or status for wireless fun
293. the Internet connection can be terminated automatically after a specified inactivity period Max Idle Time and be re established when you attempt to access the Internet again If you want your Internet connection keeps active all the time please enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field Otherwise enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet access disconnects Connect Automatically The connection can be re established automatically when it was down Time based Connecting The connection will only be established in the period from the start time to the end time both are in HH MM format Note Only when you have configured the system time on System Tools Time page will the Time based Connecting function can take effect gt Connect Manually You can click the Connect Disconnect button to connect disconnect immediately This mode also supports the Max Idle Time function as Connect on Demand mode The Internet connection can be disconnected automatically after a specified inactivity period and re established when you attempt to access the Internet again Click the Connect button to connect immediately Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately Caution Sometimes the connection cannot be terminated although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background If you want to do some advanced con
294. the Previous button to return to the previous page For example If you desire that the wireless station A with MAC address 00 0A EB B0 00 0B and the wireless station B with MAC address 00 0A EB 00 07 5F are able to access the Router but all the other wireless stations cannot access the Router you can configure the Wireless MAC Address Filtering list by following these steps 1 Click the Enabled button to enable this function 2 Select the radio button Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the list to access for Filtering Rules 3 Delete all or disable all entries if there are any entries already 53 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS 4 Click the Add New button N Enter wireless station A B in the Description field Select Enabled in the Status pull down list A OQ Click the Save button 5 Click the Back button The filtering rules that configured should be similar to the following list Enter the MAC address 00 0A EB B0 00 0B 00 0A EB 00 07 5F in the MAC Address field Filtering Rules ID MAC Address Status Description 1 00 0A EB B0 00 0B Enabled wireless station A 2 00 0A EB 00 07 5F Enabled wireless station B Deny the stations specified by any enabled entries in the list to access Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access Modify Modify Delete Modify Delete Figure 4 24 Filtering Rules 4 7 4 W
295. the partition can be FAT32 or NTFS Folder The real full path of the specified folder 127 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR A ETT TLL gt Delete You can delete the share folder by click Delete To set up your media server please follow the instructions below 1 will appear as shown in Figure 5 28 Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router and then the screen Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Media Server Setting Figure 5 28 Media Server Setting 2 Click the Start button to start the media server and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 5 29 Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Started O Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name File System Folder Delete Media Server Setting Figure 5 29 Media Server Setting 128 TL WR710N MUI totes T A MCL TT 3 Click the Add share folder button to specify a folder as the search path of media server The screen will then appear as shown in Figure 5 30 Add New Folder Display Name video Partition C Share entire partition Folder Location imy share Select Folder video Figure 5 30 Add New Folder Display Name You can enter a display name for the share folder Share entire partition Choose this option and then the folders co
296. tion about the host It can be IP or MAC gt Modify To modify or delete an existing entry To add a new entry please follow the steps below 1 2 Click the Add New button In the Mode field select IP Address or MAC Address If you select IP Address the screen shown is Figure 4 61 1 In Host Description field create a unique description for the host e g Host_1 81 TL WR710N MUI kote T A MCL TITS 2 In LAN IP Address field enter the IP address e If you select MAC Address the screen shown is Figure 4 62 1 In Host Description field create a unique description for the host e g Host_1 2 In MAC Address field enter the MAC address 3 Click the Save button to complete the settings Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table Click the Next button to go to the next page or click the Previous button return to the previous page Add or Modify a Host Entry Mode IP Address J Host Description LANIP Address El Figure 4 61 Add or Modify a Host Entry Add or Modify a Host Entry Mode MAC Address Y Host Description MAC Address Figure 4 62 Add or Modify a Host Entry For example If you desire to restrict the internet activities of host with MAC address 00 11 22 33 44 AA you should first follow the settings below 1 Click Add New button in Figure 4 60 to enter the Add or Modify a Host Entry pa
297. tions for each submenu are provided below 4 18 1 Time Settings You can set time manually or get GMT from the Internet for the router on this page Time Settings Time zone GMT Greenwich Mean Time Dublin London v Date 1 1 2013 umoo Time o 2 38 HHIMM SS NTP Server 1 0 0 0 0 Optional NTP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Optional C Enable Daylight Savina Start 2013 End 2013 Daylight Saving Status Note Click the GET GMT to update the time from the internet with the pre defined servers or entering the customized server IP Address or Domain Name in the above frames Save Figure 4 88 Time Settings gt Time Zone Select your local time zone from this pull down list gt Date Enter your local date in MM DD YY into the right blanks gt Time Enter your local time in HH MM SS into the right blanks To set time manually follow the steps below Select your local time zone Enter the Date in Month Day Year format 1 2 3 Enter the Time in Hour Minute Second format 4 Click Save For automatic time synchronization 1 Enter the address of the NTP Server 1 or NTP Server 2 2 Click the Get GMT button to get GMT time from Internet if you have connected to Internet Note This setting will be used for some time based functions such as firewall You must specify your time zone once you login to the router successfully if not the time limited on these funct
298. top sharing the volume when volume is non shared you can click the Enable button to share the volume Click the Start button to start the Network Sharing service Click the Stop button to stop the Network Sharing service Click the Eject Disk button to safely remove the USB storage device that is connected to USB port This takes the drive offline A message as shown in Figure 8 30 will appear on your web browser when it is safe to detach the USB disk 219 Message from webpage O This operation will disable Media Server Are you sure to continue Figure 8 30 Safe Unplug Message Click the Rescan button to start a new scan Follow the instructions below to set up your router as a file server 1 A N Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router Click the Rescan button to find the USB drive that has been attached to the router Click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service Click the Enable button under Shared to enable the disk to share Click the Open the disk to visit the sharing disk Note The router can automatically locate new USB drive But to display the information about your USB device you need to click the Rescan button manually The new settings will not take effect until you restart the service To unplug the USB drive click Eject Disk button first Simply pulling USB drive out of the USB port can cause damage to the device and loss of data
299. u There is only one submenu under the Network menu shown in Figure 6 4 LAN 6 5 1 LAN Choose menu Network LAN and then you can configure the IP parameters of the LAN on the screen as below LAN MAC Address 00 1D 0F 01 06 28 Type Smart IP DHCP IP Address 192 168 0 254 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 x IGMP Proxy Enable Note IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol works for IPT multicast stream The device supports both IGMP proxy with enable or disable option and IGMP snooping Figure 6 5 LAN v MAC Address The physical address of the LAN ports as seen from the LAN The value can t be changed gt Type Choosing Smart IP DHCP to get IP address from DHCP server or choosing static IP to config IP address manually v IP Address Enter the IP address of your system in dotted decimal notation factory default 192 168 0 254 gt Subnet Mask An address code that determines the size of the network Normally 255 255 255 0 is used as the subnet mask gt IGMP Proxy The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP feature allows your devices in LAN can watch TV E Note 1 If you change the IP Address of LAN you must use the new IP Address to login to the Router 2 If the new LAN IP Address you set is not in the same subnet with the previous one the IP Address pool in the DHCP server will be configured automatically while the Virtual Server and DMZ Host will not tak
300. ubnet Mask Gateway Interface 1 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 LAN amp WLAN 2 239 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LAN amp WLAN Figure 4 74 Routing Table Destination Network The Destination IP Address is the address of the network or host to which the static route is assigned Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask determines which portion of an IP address is the network portion and which portion is the host portion Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway device that allows for contact between the Router and the network or host Interface This interface tells you whether the Destination IP Address is on the LAN amp WLAN internal wired and wireless networks the WAN Internet Click the Refresh button to refresh the data displayed 88 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS 4 15Bandwidth Control Bandwidth Control Rule List Figure 4 75 The Bandwidth Control menu There are two submenus under the Bandwidth Control menu as shown in Figure 4 75 Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below 4 15 1 Control Settings Choose menu Bandwidth Control Control Settings you can configure the Egress Bandwidth and Ingress Bandwidth in the next screen Their values you configure should be less than 100000Kbps For optimal control of the bandwidth please select the right Line Type and ask your ISP for the total band
301. ult setting is Automatic which can select WPA PSK Pre shared key of WPA or WPA2 PSK Pre shared key of WPA automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e Encryption When WPA PSK or WPA is set as the Authentication Type you can select either Automatic or TKIP or AES as Encryption 5 Note If you check the WPA WPA2 Personal radio button and choose TKIP encryption you will find a notice in red as shown in Figure 6 10 WPA WPA2 Personal Recommended Version Automatic Recommended Encryption TKIP he Wireless Password You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 or Hexadecimal characters between 8 and 64 Group Key Update Period D Seconds Keep it default if you are not sure minimum is 30 0 means no update We do not recommend using the TKIP encryption ifthis device operates in 802 11n mode due to the fact that TKIP is not supported by 802 11n specification Figure 6 10 WPA WPA2 Enterprise It s based on Radius Server e Version you can choose the version of the WPA security from the pull down list The default setting is Automatic which can select WPA Wi Fi Protected Access or WPA2 WPA version 2 automatically based on the wireless station s capability and request e Encryption You can select Automatic TKIP or AES e Radius Server IP Enter the IP address of the Radius server Radius Port Enter the port that Radius server used e Radius Password Enter the
302. umeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length For security purposes the password for each user account is not displayed 64 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS gt Storage Authority Choose Read and Write or Read Only from the drop down list to assign access authority of Storage Sharing to the user gt Save You can click the Save button to save your settings gt Back You can click the Back button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page c Note Please restart the service for the new settings to take effect If you cannot use the new user name and password to access the shares press Windows logo R to open the Run dialog box and type net use 192 168 0 254 delete yes and press Enter 192 168 0 254 is your router s LAN IP address If the LAN IP of the modem connected with your router is 192 168 1 x the default LAN IP of the router will automatically switch from 192 168 0 254 to 192 168 1 254 to avoid IP conflict in this case please try net use 192 168 1 254 delete yes 4 10 Forwarding Forwarding Port Triggering DMZ UPnP Figure 4 41 The Forwarding menu There are four submenus under the Forwarding menu shown in Figure 4 41 Virtual Servers Port Triggering DMZ and UPnP Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding function 4 10 1 Virtual Servers Choose menu Forwarding Virtual Servers and then you
303. uration page Back Click this button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page 4 Click the Scan All button to scan all the share folders immediately You can also select the Auto scan at same time select an auto scan interval time by drop down list In this case the media server will auto scan the share folders ct Note The max share folders number is 6 If you want share a new folder when the number has been reached to be 6 you can delete a share folder and then add a new one 8 8 3 User Accounts You can specify the user name and password for Storage Sharing users on this page Storage Sharing users can use Internet Explorer to access files on the USB drive 222 There are two default user accounts that can access the Storage Sharing They are Administrator and Guest as shown in Figure 8 35 Administrator has read write access to Storage Sharing and can access FTP Server while Guest has read only access to Storage Sharing and cannot access TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL FTP Server User Account Management Add New User User Name Password Storage Authority Modify admin admin Read and Write yes Edit guest guest Read Only no Edit Only Administrator can use a Web browser to transfer the files from a PC to the Writable shared Figure 8 35 User Account Management volume on the USB drive To add a new user account please follow the steps below 1 A WY N
304. ure the Remote Management function on this page This feature allows you to manage your Router from a remote location via the Internet Remote Management Web Management Port 80 Remote Management IP Address 0 0 0 0 Enter 255 255 255 255 for all Figure 8 48 Remote Management gt Web Management Port Web browser access normally uses the standard HTTP service port 80 This router s default remote management Web port number is 80 For greater security you can change the remote management Web interface to a custom port by entering that number in this box provided Choose a number between 1024 and 65535 but do not use the number of any common service port gt Remote Management IP Address This is the current address you will use when accessing your router from the Internet The default IP Address is 0 0 0 0 It means this function is disabled To enable this function change the default IP Address to another IP Address as desired To access the router you will type your router s WAN IP Address into your browser s Address in IE or Location in Navigator box followed by a colon and the custom port number For example if your Router s WAN address is 202 96 12 8 and you use port number 8080 enter in your browser http 202 96 12 8 8080 You will be asked for the router s password After successfully entering the password you will be able to access the router s Web based utility amp Note Be sure to c
305. ust have its DHCP client function disabled and should have a new static IP Address assigned to it because its IP Address may be changed when using the DHCP function 69 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL DMZ Current DMZ Status Enable Disable DMZ Host IP Address 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 46 DMZ To assign a computer or server to be a DMZ server 1 Check the Enable radio button 2 Enter the IP Address of a local host in the DMZ Host IP Address field 3 Click the Save button c Note After you set the DMZ host the firewall related to the host will not work 4 10 4 UPnP Choose menu Forwarding UPnP and then you can view the information about UPnP Universal Plug and Play in the screen as shown in Figure 4 47 The UPnP feature allows the devices such as Internet computers to access the local host resources or devices as needed UPnP devices can be automatically discovered by the UPnP service application on the LAN UPnP Current UPnP Status Enabled Current UPnP Settings List ID App Description External Port Protocol Internal Port IP Address Status Figure 4 47 UPnP gt Current UPnP Status UPnP can be enabled or disabled by clicking the Enable or Disable button gt Current UPnP Settings List This table displays the current UPnP information e App Description The description provided by the application in the UPnP request e External Port The external port the Router opens
306. uter as a file server 1 A N Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router Click the Rescan button to find the USB drive that has been attached to the router Click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service Click the Enable button under Shared to enable the disk to share Click the Open the disk to visit the sharing disk Note The router can automatically locate new USB drive But to display the information about your USB device you need to click the Rescan button manually The new settings will not take effect until you restart the service To unplug the USB drive click Eject Disk button first Simply pulling USB drive out of the USB port can cause damage to the device and loss of data Mounted volumes of each USB port are subject to the 8 volume limit So you cannot access more than 8 volumes on the USB storage device If you change the storage settings during the storage connection is established then the changes will not take effect until the router or the client is rebooted 4 9 2 Media Server Choose menu USB Settings Media Server you can create media server that allows you to share stored content with other computers and devices on your home network and on the Internet 61 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TS Media Server Setting Server Name TP LINK_010628 Server Status Stopped Auto scan every 2 hours Scan All Add share folder Name F
307. vanced Security Packets Statistics Interval 5 60 110 v Seconds DoS Protection Disable Enable Enable ICMP FLOOD Attack Filtering ICMP FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 s Packets Secs Enable UDP FLOOD Filtering UDP FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 500 Packets Secs Enable TCP SYN FLOOD Attack Filtering TCP SYN FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 50 Packets Secs Ignore Ping Packet from WAN Port to Router Forbid Ping Packet from LAN Portto Router Figure 8 46 Advanced Security gt Packets Statistics Interval 5 60 The default value is 10 Select a value between 5 and 60 seconds from the drop down list The Packets Statistics Interval value indicates the time section of the packets statistics The result of the statistics is used for analysis by SYN Flood UDP Flood and ICMP Flood DoS Protection Denial of Service protection Check the Enable or Disable button to enable or disable the DoS protection function Only when it is enabled will the flood filters be enabled c Note Dos Protection will take effect only when the Traffic Statistics in System Tool Traffic Statistics is enabled Enable ICMP FLOOD Attack Filtering Enable or Disable the ICMP FLOOD Attack Filtering ICMP FLOOD Packets Threshold 5 3600 The default value is 50 Enter a value between 5 3600 When the current ICMP FLOOD Packets number is beyond the set value the Router will startup the blocking functi
308. ve current configuration of router as backup or restore the configuration file you saved before Backup amp Restore Configuration Backup Configuration Fe Figure 8 89 Backup amp Restore Configuration gt Click the Backup button to save all configuration settings as a backup file in your local computer gt To restore the router s configuration follow these instructions e Click the Browse button to select the backup file which you want to restore e Click the Restore button EP Note The current configuration will be covered with the uploading configuration file The restoration process lasts for 20 seconds and the router will restart automatically Keep the router on during the restoring process to prevent any damage 260 TL WR710N MUNTANER 8 17 6 Reboot This page allows you to reboot the router Click this button to reboot this device Figure 8 90 Reboot the router Click the Reboot button to reboot the router Some settings of the router will take effect only after rebooting which include gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Change LAN IP Address System will reboot automatically MAC Clone system will reboot automatically DHCP service function Static address assignment of DHCP server Web Service Port of the router Upgrade the firmware of the router system will reboot automatically Restore the router s settings to factory default s
309. ver User Accounts Figure 8 28 The USB Settings menu There are three submenus under the USB Settings menu shown in Figure 8 28 Storage Sharing Media Server and User Accounts Click any of them and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions 218 TL WR710N MUI LTS TIN AR AN ETT TLEL 8 8 1 Storage Sharing Choose menu USB Settings Storage Sharing you can configure a USB disk drive attached to the router and view volume and share such properties as share name capacity used space and free space on this page as shown below Storage Sharing Service Status Started CO Access shared storage with password Volume Capacity Used Free Use Shared volume 1 96B 1 36B 626 MB 67 Eject Disk Rescan Figure 8 29 Storage Sharing gt Service Status Indicates the Network Sharing service s current status You can click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service and click the Stop button to stop it gt Volume The volume name of the USB drive the users have access to Volume 1 8 is mapping to USB port1 and Volume 9 16 is mapping to USB port2 gt Capacity The storage capacity of the USB driver gt Used The used space of the USB driver gt Free The available space of the USB driver gt Use The percentage of the used space gt Shared Indicates the shared or non shared status of the volume When the volume is shared you can click the Disable to s
310. width of the egress and ingress Bandwidth Control Settings Enable Bandwidth Control Oo Line Type ADSL O Other Egress Bandwidth 512 Kbps Ingress Bandwidth 2048 Kbps Figure 4 76 Bandwidth Control Settings gt Enable Bandwidth Control Check this box so that the Bandwidth Control settings can take effect gt Line Type Select the right type for you network connection If you don t know how to choose please ask your ISP for the information gt Egress Bandwidth The upload speed through the WAN port gt Ingress Bandwidth The download speed through the WAN port 4 15 2 Rule List Choose menu Bandwidth Control Rule List you can view and configure the Bandwidth Control rules in the screen below 89 gt gt TL WR710N MUI LTS NIT AR AN ETT LTL Bandwidth Control Rule List Egress Bandwidth Kbps Ingress Bandwidth Kbps Description Modify Om w m me The current listis empty Add New Delete All Previous Next Current No 1 v Page Figure 4 77 Bandwidth Control Rule List Description This is the information about the rules such as address range Egress Bandwidth This field displays the max and mix upload bandwidth through the WAN port the default is 0 Ingress Bandwidth This field displays the max and mix download bandwidth through the WAN port the default is 0 Enable This displays the status of the rule Modify
311. wn list e Click the Save button e Click the Back button The filtering rules that configured should be similar to the following list 119 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT TLL Filtering Rules Deny the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access ID MAC Address Status Description Modify 1 00 0A EB B0 00 0B Enabled wireless station A Modify Delete 2 00 0A EB 00 07 5F Enabled wireless station B Modify Delete 5 7 4 Wireless Advanced Choose menu Wireless Wireless Advanced and then you can configure the advanced settings of your wireless network Wireless Advanced Transmit Power High Beacon Interval 100 40 1000 RTS Threshold 2346 256 2346 Fragmentation Threshold 2346 256 2346 DTIM Interval 1 1 255 Enable WMM Enable Short GI C Enable AP Isolation Figure 5 16 Wireless Advanced Transmit Power Here you can specify the transmit power of Router You can select High Middle or Low which you would like High is the default setting and is recommended Beacon Interval Enter a value between 20 1000 milliseconds for Beacon Interval here The beacons are the packets sent by the Router to synchronize a wireless network Beacon Interval value determines the time interval of the beacons The default value is 100 RTS Threshold Here you can specify the RTS Request
312. x Idle Time 15 minutes 0 means remain active at all times Disconnect Disconnected Figure A 2 PPPoE Connection Mode ce Note 1 Sometimes the connection cannot be disconnected although you specify a time to Max Idle Time since some applications is visiting the Internet continually in the background 2 Ifyou are a Cable user please configure the Router following the above steps 264 TL WR710N MUITO TIN AR AN ETT TLL 2 How do configure the Router to access the Internet by Ethernet users 1 Log in to the Router click the Network menu on the left of your browser and click WAN submenu On the WAN page select Dynamic IP for WAN Connection Type finish by clicking Save Some ISPs require that you register the MAC Address of your adapter which is connected to your cable DSL Modem during installation If your ISP requires MAC register log in to the Router and click the Network menu link on the left of your browser and then click MAC Clone submenu link On the MAC Clone page if your PC s MAC address is proper MAC address click the Clone MAC Address button and your PC s MAC address will fill in the WAN MAC Address field Or else type the MAC Address into the WAN MAC Address field The format for the MAC Address is XX XX XX XX XX XX Then click the Save button It will take effect after rebooting WAN MAC Address 00 1D 0F 01 06 29 Restore Factory MAC Your PC
313. y To modify or delete an existing entry To add a new rule follow the steps below 1 2 Click the Add New button the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 8 40 Select a common application from the Common Applications drop down list then the Trigger Port field and the Incoming Ports field will be automatically filled If the Common Applications do not have the application you need enter the Trigger Port and the Incoming Ports manually Select the protocol used for Trigger Port from the Trigger Protocol drop down list either TCP UDP or All Select the protocol used for Incoming Ports from the Incoming Protocol drop down list either TCP or UDP or All 227 TL WR710N MUI LTS TINA AN ETT LTL 5 Select Enable in Status field 6 Click the Save button to save the new rule Add or Modify a Port Triggering Entry Trigger Port Trigger Protocol All Incoming Ports Incoming Protocol All Y Status Enabled Common Applications Select One Save Back Figure 8 41 Add or Modify a Port Triggering Entry To modify or delete an existing entry 1 Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify If you want to delete the entry click the Delete 2 Modify the information 3 Click the Save button Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Disable All button to make all entries disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all ent
314. ystem will reboot automatically 8 17 7 Password This page allows you to change the factory default user name and password of the router It is recommended strongly that you change the factory default user name and password of the router All users who try to access the router s Web based utility or Quick Setup will be prompted The username and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and must not include any spaces Old User Name Old Password New User Name J New Password Confirm New Password Figure 8 91 Password EP Note The new user name and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and must not include any spaces Enter the new Password twice to confirm it 261 TL WR710N MUI LTS NI TINA AN ETT TLL Click the Save button when finished Click the Clear All button to clear all 8 17 8 System Log This page allows you to query the logs of the router System Log Auto Mail Feature Disabled Mail Settings Log Type ALL v Log Level ALL v Index Time Type Level Log Content 171 1st day 02 57 44 DHCP INFO DHCPC DHCP Service unavailable recv no OFFER 170 1st day 02 57 42 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag 1 169 1st day 02 57 40 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag 1 168 1st day 02 57 36 DHCP INFO DHCPC Send DISCOVER with request ip 0 and unicast flag 0 167 1st day 02
315. zero key is not promoted or 16 ASCII characters 3 Note If you do not set the key the wireless security function is still disabled even if you have selected Shared Key as Authentication Type 6 6 3 Wireless MAC Filtering Choose menu Wireless Wireless MAC Filtering and then you can control the wireless access by configuring the Wireless MAC Filtering function as shown in Figure 6 11 Wireless MAC Filtering Wireless MAC Filtering Enabled Filtering Rules Deny the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access O Allow the stations specified by any enabled entries in the listto access ID MAC Address Status Description Modify Add New Enable A Disable All Delete All Previous Next Figure 6 11 Wireless MAC Filtering To filter wireless users by MAC Address click Enable The default setting is Disabled gt MAC Address The wireless station s MAC address that you want to access gt Status The status of this entry either Enabled or Disabled gt Description A simple description of the wireless station 146 TL WR710N MUITO TINA AN ETT TLEL To Add a Wireless MAC Address filtering entry click the Add New button The Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry page will appear shown in Figure 6 12 Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry MAC Address Description Status Enabled vj Save Back

TP-Link TL-WR710N User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents